AC030_Treasury.pdf

393
AC030 Treasury AC030 Release 470 15.08.2004 PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

description

Treasury Doc

Transcript of AC030_Treasury.pdf

Page 1: AC030_Treasury.pdf

AC030 TreasuryAC030

Release 470 15.08.2004

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 2: AC030_Treasury.pdf

AC030 Treasury ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Copyright ....................................................................................................................................................... 2

Treasury...................................................................................................................................................... 4

Euro............................................................................................................................................................ 5

Course Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................... 6

Target Group .............................................................................................................................................. 7

Course Overview............................................................................................................................................ 1

Course Goals .............................................................................................................................................. 2

Course Objectives ....................................................................................................................................... 3

Course Content ........................................................................................................................................... 4

Course Overview Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 5

Main Business Scenario .............................................................................................................................. 6

Navigation...................................................................................................................................................... 1

Navigation: Unit Objectives ........................................................................................................................ 2

Course Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 3

Navigation: Business Scenario .................................................................................................................... 4

Logging On to the System ........................................................................................................................... 5

SAP Easy Access - Standard ....................................................................................................................... 6

Role-Based User Menu ............................................................................................................................... 7

Screen Elements ......................................................................................................................................... 8

Selecting Functions..................................................................................................................................... 9

Field Help: F1 and F4 ............................................................................................................................... 10

Menus: System and Help........................................................................................................................... 11

SAP Library.............................................................................................................................................. 12

User-Specific Personalization.................................................................................................................... 13

Personalizing the Frontend with GuiXT..................................................................................................... 14

Elements of the Workplace........................................................................................................................ 15

Active Applications (In Use) ..................................................................................................................... 16

Workplace Favorites ................................................................................................................................. 17

Personalizing MiniApps............................................................................................................................ 18

Workplace: Advantages ............................................................................................................................ 19

Navigation: Unit Summary........................................................................................................................ 20

Navigation - Exercises .............................................................................................................................. 21

Navigation - Solutions............................................................................................................................... 26

SAP Treasury Overview ................................................................................................................................. 1

SAP Treasury Overview: Unit Objectives.................................................................................................... 2

Course Overview Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 3

SAP Treasury Overview: Business Scenario................................................................................................ 4

SAP Treasury Overview.............................................................................................................................. 5

SAP Support for Business Requirements ..................................................................................................... 6

Defining the Organizational Framework ...................................................................................................... 7

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 3: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Investment and Risk Guidelines .................................................................................................................. 8

Selection of Financial Instruments............................................................................................................... 9

Hedging.................................................................................................................................................... 10

Identifying Treasury Processes .................................................................................................................. 11

SAP Treasury Overview: Unit Summary ................................................................................................... 12

Liquidity Management in the Short andMedium Term..................................................................................... 1

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Unit Objectives ...................................................... 2

Course Overview Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 3

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Cash Management Scenario.................................... 4

Analysis and Trading Process...................................................................................................................... 5

Main Targets of Treasury ............................................................................................................................ 6

Liquidity Management ................................................................................................................................ 7

Cash Management: Functions...................................................................................................................... 8

Electronic Banking: Functions..................................................................................................................... 9

Electronic Banking: General Process ......................................................................................................... 10

Electronic Banking: Check Deposit ........................................................................................................... 11

Electronic Banking ................................................................................................................................... 12

Control Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 13

Cash Position ............................................................................................................................................ 14

Structure/Views of Liquidity Analysis ....................................................................................................... 15

Corporate Group Evaluations .................................................................................................................... 16

Cash Concentration................................................................................................................................... 17

Liquidity Forecast ..................................................................................................................................... 18

Exercise: Cash Management Functions...................................................................................................... 19

Cash Position and Liquidity Forecast......................................................................................................... 20

Integration with Other SAP Modules......................................................................................................... 21

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Treasury Management Scenario............................ 22

Treasury and Market Risk Management .................................................................................................... 23

Identifying Treasury Processes .................................................................................................................. 24

Transaction and Position Management Process .......................................................................................... 25

Treasury Management: Functions.............................................................................................................. 26

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Money Market Scenario ....................................... 27

Money Market: Product Types .................................................................................................................. 28

Transaction and Position Management Process: Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit .................................... 29

Trading: Entering a Fixed-Term Deposit ................................................................................................... 30

Creating Contract Data: Fixed-Term Deposit ............................................................................................. 31

Organizational Units ................................................................................................................................. 32

Basic Principles of Transaction Management (1) ....................................................................................... 33

Business Partner - Roles and Functions ..................................................................................................... 34

Business Partner - Data: Overview ............................................................................................................ 35

Business Partner and Trader Authorization ................................................................................................ 36

Exercise: Creating a New Business Partner................................................................................................ 37

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 4: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Creating a Fixed-Term Deposit: Structure.................................................................................................. 38

Trading Support ........................................................................................................................................ 39

Financial Transactions: Cash Flow ............................................................................................................ 40

Financial Transaction Architecture ............................................................................................................ 41

Condition Types/Flow Types..................................................................................................................... 42

Financial Transactions in Cash Management ............................................................................................. 43

Exercise: Integrating Trading Functions toCash Management .................................................................... 44

Cash Flows in Cash Management .............................................................................................................. 45

Collective Processing: Money Market ....................................................................................................... 46

Transaction Management: Worklist and Collective Processing................................................................... 47

Money Market - Fast Processing ............................................................................................................... 48

SAP Business Workflow........................................................................................................................... 49

Transaction and Position Management Process: Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit .................................... 50

Back Office............................................................................................................................................... 51

Business Partners: Standing Instructions.................................................................................................... 52

Correspondence ........................................................................................................................................ 53

Business Partner: Standing Instructions - Correspondence ......................................................................... 54

Business Partner - Payment Details (1) ...................................................................................................... 55

Business Partner - Payment Details (2) ...................................................................................................... 56

Transaction Settlement / Control ............................................................................................................... 57

Exercise: Confirmation Management and Control Functions in the Back Office Area................................. 58

Transaction and Position Management:Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit ................................................. 59

Accounting ............................................................................................................................................... 60

Payment Transaction Handling.................................................................................................................. 61

Postings: Account Assignment Reference.................................................................................................. 62

Customizing: Account Determination........................................................................................................ 63

Posting a Transaction: Summary .............................................................................................................. 64

Treasury Management and Cash Management ........................................................................................... 65

Transfer to Financial Accounting -Logical Process .................................................................................... 66

Exercise: Posting Due Flows to FI and Evaluating them in Cash Management ........................................... 67

Payment Transaction Handling.................................................................................................................. 68

Posting using the Payment Program........................................................................................................... 69

Accrual/Deferral Procedures and Methods................................................................................................. 70

Interest Accruals/Deferrals: Customizing................................................................................................... 71

Exercise: Interest Amount Accruals/Deferrals at Year End ........................................................................ 72

Transaction History................................................................................................................................... 73

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Foreign Exchange Scenario (1)............................. 74

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Foreign Exchange Scenario (2)............................. 75

Foreign Exchange: Product Types ............................................................................................................. 76

Creating an Order: Forward Exchange Transaction .................................................................................... 77

Currency Master Data ............................................................................................................................... 78

Datafeed Architecture ............................................................................................................................... 79

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 5: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Exercise: Managing Currency Risks in CashManagement using Forex Transactions................................... 80

Foreign Exchange in Cash Management .................................................................................................... 81

Netting and Payment Requests .................................................................................................................. 82

Exercise: Active Liquidity Management using Netted Money Market and Forex Transactions.................... 83

Valuation: Valuation Units........................................................................................................................ 84

Foreign Currency Valuation (FCV Determination: 2)................................................................................. 85

Foreign Currency Valuation ...................................................................................................................... 86

Foreign Currency Valuation (1) - G/L Accounting.................................................................................... 87

Foreign Currency Valuation (2) - G/L Accounting.................................................................................... 88

Foreign Currency Valuation (3) - G/L Accounting.................................................................................... 89

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Limit Management .............................................. 90

Limit Management (1) .............................................................................................................................. 91

Limit Management (2) .............................................................................................................................. 92

Limit Management (3) .............................................................................................................................. 93

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Unit Summary (1) ................................................ 94

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Unit Summary (2) ................................................ 95

Data for the............................................................................................................................................... 96

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term Exercises............................................................... 98

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Solutions............................................................ 107

Financial Transactions in the Medium andLong Term ..................................................................................... 1

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Unit Objectives ....................................................... 2

Course Overview Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 3

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Securities Management Scenario............................. 4

Treasury and Market Risk Management ...................................................................................................... 5

Treasury Management: Functions................................................................................................................ 6

Product Categories - Product Types............................................................................................................. 7

Class Master Data: Product Types - General Data........................................................................................ 8

Product Type - Conditions - Flows .............................................................................................................. 9

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Scenario - Evaluating the Securities Position ......... 10

Standard Reports: Examples (Securities) ................................................................................................... 11

Reports ..................................................................................................................................................... 12

Sample Evaluation using Position Information........................................................................................... 13

Securities: Position Overview Object List.................................................................................................. 14

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Concluding Securities Transactions....................... 15

Sample Evaluation .................................................................................................................................... 16

Part Sale of Stocks .................................................................................................................................... 17

Transaction and Position Management Process .......................................................................................... 18

Transaction Management: Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 19

Process View: Trading - Back Office - Accounting................................................................................... 20

Basic Principles of Transaction Management............................................................................................. 21

Create Order: Initial Screen....................................................................................................................... 22

Create Order ............................................................................................................................................. 23

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 6: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Execute Order........................................................................................................................................... 24

Back Office: Overview.............................................................................................................................. 25

Collective Processing: List ........................................................................................................................ 26

Securities Account Cash Flow................................................................................................................... 27

Post Transaction ....................................................................................................................................... 28

Position Management Posting Journal: View ............................................................................................. 29

Exercise: Concluding Securities Transactions Integration to Cash Management ......................................... 30

Period-End Closing: Securities .................................................................................................................. 31

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Create Class Master Data ...................................... 32

Class Data Notation .................................................................................................................................. 33

Class......................................................................................................................................................... 34

Classes: Product Categories - Overview..................................................................................................... 35

Create Class: Bond.................................................................................................................................... 36

Create Class: Bonds - Basic Data ............................................................................................................. 37

Create Class: Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 38

Exercise: Creating Class Master Data ........................................................................................................ 39

Automatic Posting I .................................................................................................................................. 40

Automatic Posting II with Incoming Payments .......................................................................................... 41

Defining Organizational Elements: Portfolios and Securities Accounts ...................................................... 42

Securities Account and Portfolio ............................................................................................................... 43

Define Portfolios....................................................................................................................................... 44

Securities Account Master Data................................................................................................................. 45

Master Data: Position Indicator - Initial Screen.......................................................................................... 47

Master Data: Position Indicator - Data ....................................................................................................... 48

Exercise: Defining Organizational Elements:Securities Accounts and Position Indicators........................... 49

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Accounting Functions: Valuation .......................... 50

Position Management Alternatives ............................................................................................................ 51

Position Management and Valuation Categories ........................................................................................ 52

Valuation Principles (One-Step): Scenarios ............................................................................................... 53

Valuation Principles (One-Step) ................................................................................................................ 54

General Concept: Securities Position Management and Valuation .............................................................. 55

Securities Management: Overview ............................................................................................................ 56

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Scenario: Loans Taken.......................................... 57

Loans Given - Loans Taken....................................................................................................................... 58

New Loan Transactions: Process Overview ............................................................................................... 59

Possible Procedures for Loan Processing ................................................................................................... 60

Loans Given/Taken and Posting ................................................................................................................ 61

General Posting Options I ......................................................................................................................... 62

General Posting Options II ........................................................................................................................ 63

Transaction Process: Example ................................................................................................................... 64

Contract - 4 Ways of Entering Contracts in the SAP System ...................................................................... 65

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Scenario: Create Contract...................................... 66

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 7: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Contract - Function Overview ................................................................................................................... 67

Loan - Initial Screen.................................................................................................................................. 68

Contract - Basic Data ................................................................................................................................ 69

Condition Header / Condition Items .......................................................................................................... 70

Contract - Condition Header...................................................................................................................... 71

Contract - Condition Items ........................................................................................................................ 72

Condition Items - Fields............................................................................................................................ 73

Condition Structure................................................................................................................................... 74

Loans - Cash Flow .................................................................................................................................... 75

Effective Interest Calculation .................................................................................................................... 76

Payment Schedule..................................................................................................................................... 77

Exercise: Create Contract .......................................................................................................................... 78

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Scenario: Disbursement ........................................ 79

Contract: Disbursement............................................................................................................................. 80

Disburse Contract: Incidental Costs........................................................................................................... 81

Save / Post Disbursement .......................................................................................................................... 82

Integration with FI .................................................................................................................................... 83

Disburse Contract: Posting ........................................................................................................................ 84

Planned -> Actual Record ......................................................................................................................... 85

Integration with R/3 Financial Accounting / TR Cash Management ........................................................... 86

Exercise: Disburse Contract ...................................................................................................................... 87

Payment Options....................................................................................................................................... 88

Incoming Bank Transfer: Example of Manual Bank Statement .................................................................. 89

Disbursement Payment (Bank Transfer): Posting ....................................................................................... 90

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Scenario: Payments Due ....................................... 91

Automatic Posting: Post Planned Records.................................................................................................. 92

Post Planned Records Due......................................................................................................................... 93

Exercise: Post Amounts as ........................................................................................................................ 94

Payment Options....................................................................................................................................... 95

Outgoing Payments................................................................................................................................... 96

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Closing Operations / Special Cases........................ 97

Closing Operations / Special Cases............................................................................................................ 98

Accrual/Deferral: Overview ...................................................................................................................... 99

Valuation: Position Valuation.................................................................................................................. 100

Loans - Cash Flow .................................................................................................................................. 101

Cash Flow: Making Changes................................................................................................................... 102

Loans - Cash Flow: Display Variants....................................................................................................... 103

Business Operations for a Contract.......................................................................................................... 104

Types of Business Operation ................................................................................................................... 105

Enter Charges as Business Operation: Example ....................................................................................... 106

Transfer Postings: Overview ................................................................................................................... 107

Loans: Release........................................................................................................................................ 108

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 8: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Unit Summary (1) ............................................... 109

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term: Unit Summary (2) ............................................... 110

Data used in the Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term .......................................... 111

Financial Transactions in the medium and long term Exercises ................................................................ 113

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term Solutions ............................................................. 122

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions.................................................................................. 1

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Unit Objectives .................................................... 2

Course Overview Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 3

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Business Scenario ................................................ 4

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Analysis and Simulation....................................... 5

Risk Categories........................................................................................................................................... 6

Risk Controlling in Treasury ....................................................................................................................... 7

Defining the Organizational Framework ...................................................................................................... 8

Investment and Risk Guidelines .................................................................................................................. 9

Selection of Financial Instruments............................................................................................................. 10

Hedging.................................................................................................................................................... 11

Risk Process in Treasury ........................................................................................................................... 12

Market Risk Management: Functions ........................................................................................................ 13

Integration of Scenarios and Fictitious Transactions .................................................................................. 14

Instruments in Currency and Interest Management..................................................................................... 15

Financial Instruments and Influencing Factors ........................................................................................... 16

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Mark-to-Market Valuation ................................. 17

Mark-to-Market Valuation ........................................................................................................................ 18

Mark-To-Market Valuation: Procedure...................................................................................................... 19

Example: Valuation of Swaps.................................................................................................................... 20

Mark-to-Market Valuation - Calculation Base ........................................................................................... 21

Mark-to-Market Valuation - Details Log ................................................................................................... 22

Exercise: Mark-to-Market ......................................................................................................................... 23

Storing OTC NPVs ................................................................................................................................... 24

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Currency Risks................................................... 25

Exposure Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 26

Integration of a Company’s Cash Flows..................................................................................................... 27

Currency Exposure.................................................................................................................................... 28

Option Exposure ....................................................................................................................................... 29

Currency Option ....................................................................................................................................... 30

Create OTC Currency Option .................................................................................................................... 31

Currency Option: Option Price Calculator ................................................................................................. 32

Exercise: Currency Exposure..................................................................................................................... 33

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Interest Rate Risks ............................................. 34

Interest Rate Exposure .............................................................................................................................. 35

Interest Rate Exposure - Determine Basis Point Value .............................................................................. 36

Forward Rate Agreement .......................................................................................................................... 37

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 9: AC030_Treasury.pdf

Create FRA............................................................................................................................................... 38

Swaps ....................................................................................................................................................... 39

Enter: Interest Rate Swap .......................................................................................................................... 40

Manual / Automatic Interest Rate Adjustment............................................................................................ 41

Exercise: Interest Rate Exposure ............................................................................................................... 42

Analysis / Simulation - Key Figures ........................................................................................................ 43

Analysis / Simulation - Evaluations ........................................................................................................... 44

Analysis / Simulation - Structure ............................................................................................................... 45

Exercise: Analysis and Simulation............................................................................................................. 46

Integrated Market Risk Management ......................................................................................................... 47

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions: Unit Summary.................................................... 48

SAP Treasury Overview............................................................................................................................ 49

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions Exercises ............................................................ 50

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions Solutions............................................................. 56

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 10: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 1999

AC030 Treasury

SAP AG

AC030AC030

TreasuryTreasury

n SAP R/3 System

n Release 4.6C

n Status: December 2000

n Material number: 50041165

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 11: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 2003

Copyright 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted inany form or for any purpose without the express permission ofSAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

All rights reserved.

Copyright

Trademarks:

n Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

n Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

n IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner,WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks ofIBM Corporation in USA and/or other countries.

n ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

n UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

n Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks ofCitrix Systems, Inc.

n HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World WideWeb Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

n JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

n JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape.

n MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 12: AC030_Treasury.pdf

n SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentionedherein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG inGermany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service namesmentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 13: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 1999

Treasury

Treasury Overview

AC030 3 days

Level 2 Level 3

Financial Accountingand Reporting

AC010 5 days

Cash BudgetManagement

AC215 1 day

Basic Functions inTreasury Management

AC810 3 days

Cash Management

AC805 3 days

Money Market, ForeignExchange and Derivatives

AC825 3 days

Loans Management forFinancial Services

AC815 5 days

Loans Management forCorporates

AC816 3 days

Securities Management

AC820 4 days

Market Risk Management

AC830 3 days

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 14: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 1999

Euro

I.Conversion oflocal currency

Treasury ManagementR/3R/3

II.Conversion of

position currency(for securities)

III.Conversion oftransaction or

contract currency(usual module)

• The company itself triggers conversion• Convert all flows on a key date after closed fiscal year• Reconcile rounding differences, generate adjustment flows, and post

to specific accounts• No postings in closed fiscal year

• Notification from issuer triggers conversion• Convert nominal values, book values, and historical acquisition values

selectively• Reconcile rounding differences with the depository bank, generate

adjustment flows, and post to specific account• Adjust class data• Adjust nominal values using alternative means

• Business partners agree on conversion date - depends on term/duedate of transactions/contracts

• Convert transactions/contracts selectively• Reconcile rounding differences, generate adjustment flows, and post

to specific accounts

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 15: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 1999

Course Prerequisites

l Required:n You must already be familiar with the SAP R/3 System

l Recommended:

n We recommend that you attend the SAP20 - SAP R/3 Overview course

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 16: AC030_Treasury.pdf

SAP AG 1999

Target Group

l Participants:n Project teamn DP administrators

l Duration: 3 days

Note

n These training materials are not designed as a self-study program. They are only complete when usedin conjunction with the instructor's explanations. Space is provided for your notes on theseexplanations.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 17: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview

l Course Goals

l Course Objectives

l Course Content

l Course Overview Diagram

l Main Business Scenario

Contents:

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 18: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

Course Goals

This course will prepare you to:

l Use all the options provided by the SAP R/3Treasury module in order to ensure that yourshort-, medium-, and long-term cash flowsand their related risks are managed efficiently.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 19: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 1999

At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:

l Describe the relationships between the SAPCash Management, Treasury Management,Loans Management, and Market RiskManagement applications

l Set up the structures required for managingshort-, medium-, and long-term liquidity in yourcompany

l Explain the different ways of monitoring andcontrolling market risk

l Define the system settings needed to controlinternal processing

Course Objectives

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 20: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

Unit 5 Financial Transactions in theMedium and Long Term

Unit 6 Market Risk Managementand Managing Risk Positions

Unit 1 Course Overview

Unit 2 Introduction

Unit 3 SAP Treasury Overview

Unit 4 Liquidity Management in theShort and Medium Term

Preface

Appendix

Course Content

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 21: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

SAP Treasury Overview

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term

Introduction

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 22: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

l You are using (or have successfully installed) theSAP FI module. You now want to activate short-,medium-, and long-term liquidity management anduse the Market Risk Management options.

Main Business Scenario

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 23: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 2001

l Navigation in the system

l User-specific settings

l Navigation in the mySAP Workplace

Contents:

Navigation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 24: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

l Identify the elements of a typical window

l Navigate in the system

l Personalize your user settings

l Describe and use the mySAP.com Workplace

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Navigation: Unit Objectives

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 25: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 2002

Course Overview

PLM Interface 33

Product Replication

Classification 66

77

22

NavigationNavigation 11 55

Variant Configuration

Document Management

Material Master / Bill ofMaterial / EWB / Portal 44 88Change Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 26: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

l New users need to familiarize themselves with thescreens in the system and define their personaldefault settings

Navigation: Business Scenario

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 27: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

Logging On to the System

Client

UserPassword

Language

New Password

SAP R/3SAP R/3

T70 (1) (000) iwdf5070 INS

User System Help

You can place your own text on the initial screen: See SAP Note 205487

If you have problems logging on,contact Donna Moore, x486

n SAP R/3 Systems are client systems. The client concept enables the parallel operation, in onesystem, of several enterprises that are independent of each other in business terms. The componentsSAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) and SAP Knowledge Warehouse (KW) are exceptionsto this: in these cases only one client is used. During each user session you can only access the dataof the client selected during logon.

n A client is, in organizational terms, an independent unit in the system. Each client has its own dataenvironment and therefore its own master data and transaction data, assigned user master records andcharts of accounts, and specific Customizing parameters.

n For a user to log on to the system, a master record must exist in the system for that user. To protectaccess, a password is required for logon. The password is hidden as you type (you only seeasterisks).

n SAP R/3 Systems are available in several languages. Use the Language input field to select the logonlanguage for each session.

n Multiple logons are always logged in the system beginning with SAP R/3 4.6. This is for security aswell as licensing reasons. A warning message appears if the same user attempts to log on twice ormore. This message offers three options:

ü Continue with current logon and end any other logons of the same user in the system

ü Continue with current logon without ending any other logons in the system (logged in system)

ü Terminate current logon attempt

n You can place your own text on the initial screen in a number of ways. For more information, see theSAP Note mentioned above. The GuiXT (covered at the end of this chapter) offers a further option.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 28: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

SAP Easy Access - Standard

SAPSAP Easy Easy Access AccessOther Menu

Menu Edit Favorites Extras System Help

Create Role Assign User Documentation

FavoritesSAP Menu

OfficeLogisticsAccountingHuman ResourcesInformation SystemsTools

T70 (1) (400) iwdf5070 INS

You are greeted by your logo in the right-hand part of the window.

n SAP Easy Access is the standard entry screen displayed after logon. You navigate through thesystem using a compact tree structure.

n You can include an image on the right-hand side of the screen such as your company logo. Thisimage can only be entered systemwide, and is a cross-client setting. Assuming you have theappropriate authorization, you can find a detailed description of the necessary settings by choosingExtras → Administration Information. Note that this image is stored in the system and transported tothe SAP Frontend every time it is called by SAP Easy Access. Although this transfer is compressed,the image for the initial screen should not be bigger than around 20 kB. You can prevent this imagebeing called either by using the setting Low Speed Connection in the SAPLogon program (see SAPNote 161053), or by switching off the calling of the image under Extras→Settings. See also User-Specific Personalization.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 29: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 7

SAP AG 1999

Role-Based User Menu

SAPSAP Easy Easy Access - Access - Enjoy User MenuEnjoy User MenuOther Menu

Menu Edit Favorites Extras System Help

Create Role Assign User Documentation

T70 (1) (400) iwdf5070 INS

FavoritesGreat Transactions

SM50 - Prcoess OverviewVA01 - Create Sales Order

Interesting WWW PagesURL - The Herald TribuneURL - Time Magazine

Important FilesURL - Vacation Planning

Enjoy User MenuURL - SAP Notes (User / PW req.)Accounts Receivable

FD02 - Change Customer (Accountin

Favorites chosen by the userreduce navigation time

A role-based menu contains the activitiesthat the user can execute based on therole assigned to the user in the system.

Sales and DsitributionTools

Materials Management

n A Role describes a set of logically linked transactions in the system. These represent the range offunctions users typically need for their work.

n User roles (previously “activity groups”) have to be set up using the Profile Generator so that SAPR/3 System users can work with user-specific or position-related menus.

n The authorizations for the activities listed in the menus are also assigned to the users using userroles. With Release 4.6, predefined user roles from all application areas are included in the standardsystem.

n Users who have been assigned a user role can choose between the user menu and the SAP standardmenu.

n The above screen shows the role-based user menu for a user with the name "Enjoy". You can findroles that are supplied in the standard SAP R/3 System by choosing Other menu on the SAP EasyAccess initial screen.

n Every enduser can personalize the initial screen using Favorites. You can create your own Favoriteslist containing the transactions, reports, files, and Web addresses that you use most often.

n You can add favorites either by choosing Favorites or by using the mouse to “drag & drop” itemsinto the Favorites directory.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 30: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 8

SAP AG 1999

Screen Elements

System System Function Function Name: Name: ActivityActivity

Menu Edit Favorites Extras System Help

Choose Save

Input field

Tick

Selection 1

Selection 4

Selection 2

Selection 3

OptionsOption 1Option 2Option 3Option 4Option 5

Display Edit

Overview

Neutral

Positive

System Message T70 (1) (400) iwdf5070 INS Status Bar

ApplicationToolbar

Command Field Standard Toolbar

CheckboxesRadio ButtonsPushbuttons

Tab Page

This screen is made up ofvarious screen elements. Itdoes not match an actual

screen in the system.

n Command field: You can use the command field to go to applications directly by entering thetransaction code. You can find the transaction code either in the SAP Easy Access menu tree (see thepage User-Specific Personalization) or in the appropriate application by choosing System→ Status.

n Standard toolbar: The icons in the standard toolbar are available on all SAP R/3 screens. Any iconsthat you cannot use on a particular screen are dimmed. If you leave the cursor on an icon for amoment, a QuickInfo appears with the name (or function) of that icon. You will also see thecorresponding function key. The application toolbar shows you which functions are available in thecurrent application.

n Checkboxes: Checkboxes allow you to select several options simultaneously within a group.

n Radio buttons: Radio buttons allow you to select one option only.

n Tabs: Tabs provide a clearer overview of several information screens.

n Status bar: The status bar displays information on the current system status, for example, warningsor error messages.

Other elements are:

Menu bar: The menus shown here depend on which application you are working in. These menuscontain cascading menu options.

Title bar: The title bar displays your current position and activity in the system.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 31: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 9

SAP AG 1999

Selecting Functions

Menu Edit Favorites Extras System Help

SAPSAP Easy Easy Access - Access - Enjoy User MenuEnjoy User Menu

Create sessionEnd sessionUser profileServicesUtilitiesListServices for objectObject historyOwn spool requestsOwn JobsShort MessageStatus...Log off

FavoritesEnjoy User Menu

URL - SAP Notes (User / PW req.)Accounts Receivable

FD02 -Change Customer (AccountMaterials ManagementSales and DistributionTools

... using the transaction code in the command field

... using SAP Easy Access and Favorites

... using the menu path

n You can select system functions in the following ways:

ü Use the mouse to choose: Menu options, Favorites, and SAP Easy Access options

ü Use the keyboard (ALT + the underlined letter of the relevant menu option)

ü Enter a transaction code in the command field:A transaction code is assigned to each function in SAP R/3 Systems. You can access the assignedtransaction code from any screen in the system. For example, to display customer master data,enter /n and the appropriate transaction code (in this case /nfd03). You can find the transactioncode for the function you are working in under the Status option of the System menu. Otherpossible entries:

- /n ends the current transaction.

- /i ends the current session.

- /osm04 creates a new session and goes to the transaction specified (SM04).

n You can also use the keyboard to go to the command field. Use the CTRL + TAB key combinationto move the cursor from one (input) field group to the next.Use TAB to move between fields within a group.

n By entering search_sap_menu in the command field, you can search for and display the menupath for an SAP transaction. You can also search for text strings.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 32: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 10

SAP AG 1999

Field Help: F1 and F4

Display Display CustomerCustomer: Initial : Initial ScreenScreen

Customer Edit Goto Extras Environment System Help

Customer

Company Code

Restrictions

Company Code

Company Name

City

Currency

Restrict Number to

1000Customer

SAP A.G. Walldorf EUR

Co... Company Name City Cur...

Restrictions

IDES AG 1000 Frankfurt UNIIDES Canada Toronto CAD

IDES AG Frankfurt UNI

Customer account number

A unique key is used to clearly identify the customer within the SAP

System.

Procedure

When creating a customer master record, the user either enters the

account number of the customer or has the system determine the

number when the record is saved, depending on the type of number

assignment used. The account group determines how numbers are

assigned.

F4 Help: DisplaysPossible Entries

F1 Help: Displays the Meaning ofFields and Technical Information

Entries Found

n For help on fields, menus, functions, and messages, use F1.

n F1 help also provides technical information on the relevant field. This includes, for example, theparameter ID, which you can use to assign values for your user to input fields , which have to referto these parameter IDs.

n For information on what values you can enter, use F4. You can also access F4 help for a selectedfield using the button immediately to the right of that field.

n If input fields are marked with a small icon with a checkmark, then you can only continue in thatapplication by entering a permitted value. You can mark many fields in an application as eitherrequired entry fields or optional entry fields. You can also hide fields and preassign values usingtransaction or screen variants or Customizing.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 33: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 11

SAP AG 1999

Menus: System and Help

SAPSAP Easy Easy Access AccessOther Menu

Menu Edit Favorites Extras System Help

Rolle anlegen Benutzer zuordnen Documentation

FavoritesSAP Menu

OfficeLogisticsAccountingPersonnelInformation SystemsTools

T70 (1) (400) iwdf5070 INS

Create SessionEnd SessionUser profileServicesUtilitiesListServices for objectObject historyOwn spool requestsOwn jobsShort messageStatus...Log off

Application helpSAP LibraryGlossaryRelease NotesSAPNetFeedbackSettings...

Both of these menus are available on every screenand always offer exactly the same options.

n The System menu contains, among others, the following options:

ü Create/End Session: Allows you to create and end sessions. The maximum number of sessions canbe set to a number between 2 and 6 by the system administrator using the parameterrdisp/max_alt_modes.

ü User profile: This is where you can enter user-specific settings. For example, you can useParameter IDs in Own Data, in order to set default values for specific user-dependent fields in thesystem (for example the company code field).

ü List: Contains important list functions, such as searching for character strings, saving in PC files,printing, and so on.

ü Status: Enables you to display important user and system data.

ü Log off: Ends the R/3 session with a confirmation prompt.

n The Help menu contains, among others, the following options:

ü Context-sensitive Application Help

ü Access to the SAP Library (see previous page)

ü a Glossary

ü ...

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 34: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 12

SAP AG 1999

SAP Library

SAP Library - SAP Library

SAPLibrary

Contents Index Search SAP LibraryRelease 4.6C, March 2000

IDES

Getting Started

Release Notes

Implementation Guide

Glossary

Copyright 2000 SAP AGAll rights reserved.

You can access thecomplete online

documentation for thesystem using the SAP

Library

n SAP R/3 Systems provide comprehensive online help. You can display the help from any screen inthe system. You can always request help using the Help menu or using the relevant icon (the yellowquestion mark).

n You can access the SAP Library quickly and comfortably by using the SAP Service Marketplace.There you can find the SAP Help Portal under Knowledge and Training, where you can not onlyaccess Help in HTML format, but can also perform efficient full-text searches in the SAP Library. Ifyou have the SAP Library installed, you also have, of course, these opportunities within yourcompany.

n You can access the Help Portal directly at http://help.sap.com

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 35: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 13

SAP AG 1999

User-Specific Personalization

SAPSAP Easy Easy Access AccessOther Menu

Menu Edit Favorites Exrtas System Help

Rolle anlegen Benutzer zuordnen Dokumentation

FavoritesSAP Menu

OfficeLogisticsAccountingHuman ResourcesInformation SystemsTools

T70 (1) (400) iwdf5070 INS

Administration InformationAssign userDisplay DocumentationTechnical DetailsSettingsSet Start Transaction

Ctrl+Shift+ F8

Shift+ F6

Shift+ F7Shift+ F9

Ctrl+Shift+ F10

Display favorites at end of list

Settings

This is used to specify settings

Do not display menu, only display favoritesDo not display pictureDisplay technical names

Options ...Generate GraphicCreate Shortcut ...Activate GuiXTDefault SizeHardcopyQuick Cut and PasteAbout...

Different Settings options make working with the system easier

n The end user has many possibilities for personalizing the system. Some are described below:

ü You can alter the layout of your initial screen under Extras → Settings, for example by switchingoff the image in the right-hand part of the window or by turning on the option to display thetechnical names (transaction codes) in the SAP Easy Access Menu.

ü Among other things, you can activate a quick cut and paste in the Options menu. Using Optionsyou can change the reaction speed of the QuickInfo that is displayed when you hold your mousecursor over an icon or a push button.

ü By following the path System→ User profile→ Own data, you can set personal standard values.You can choose the tabs Address, Defaults, and Parameters. As an example, the setting ofParameters is explained here:

- Parameters: Here you can set defaults for frequently used input fields. In order to be able set adefault value for a field, it must have been assigned a Parameter ID.

Procedure for finding the Parameter ID: Go to the field for which you wish to set a defaultvalue. Select the F1 help, and then choose Technical Info. The system displays an informationwindow that contains the relevant parameter ID under the heading Field Data (as long as thefield has been assigned a Parameter ID).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 36: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 14

SAP AG 1999

Personalizing the Frontend with GuiXT

FD03 with GuiXTFD03 without GuiXT

Example from http://www.guixt.com

n SAP R/3 Systems offer numerous options for settings and adjustments:

ü Define default values for input fields

ü Hide screen elements

ü Deactivate screen elements (dimmed)You can do this by, for example, defining transaction variants.

n SAP offers GuiXT, as of SAP R/3 Release 4.6. In addition to all of the above functions, you cannow:

ü Include graphics

ü Convert fields and add pushbuttons and text

ü Change input fields (or their F4 help results) into radio buttons

n GuiXT scripts are stored on the Frontend. In accordance with local scripts (which can also be storedcentrally), the GUIXT scripts determine how data sent from the application server is displayed.These scripts can be standard throughout a company, or they can be different for each Frontend.

n NOTE: The GuiXT will support the mySAP.com Workplace only as of the end of the year 2000.This means that until then you should use either the SAP GUI for the Windows Environment and theGuiXT or the mySAP.com Workplace with the SAP GUI for HTML (or the SAP GUI for Java or theSAP GUI for Windows).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 37: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 15

SAP AG 1999

Elements of the Workplace

mySAP.com-Marktplatz Aktualisieren Anpassen Getting Started Info

Willkommen Willi WorkplaceIn UseStart Page

Workplace FavoritesRoles

Demonstration Role

Web Search

Search in Start Search

WorkSpace (MiniApps, Transactions, & Web Pages)LaunchPad

Drag&Relate

Expand/Collapse LaunchPad Log off from the Workplace

n The graphic above shows Release 2.11 of the mySAP.com Workplace.

n You call the mySAP.com Workplace by entering the relevant URL (Internet address) in a WebBrowser. Usually this is done by clicking a link (instead of being entered manually).The syntax for the URL of the Workplace is typically<protocol>://<webserver>[:<port>]/scripts/wgate/sapwp/!, for example:https://workplace.wdf.sap-ag.de:1042/scripts/wgate/sapwp/!The ! is an essential part of the call.

n The browser window of the mySAP.com Workplace consists of three areas:

ü When working with the mySAP.com Workplace, the roles containing the entries relevant to yourjob appear in the LaunchPad. You can also add your own entries (Favorites) to the LaunchPad.

ü When you log on to the mySAP.com Workplace, the list of MiniApps (for example: theStockTicker, news, overview lists, or reports) that are assigned to your role appears in theWorkSpace on the right-hand side, as well as MiniApps that you have added yourself. If you starta particular transaction in the LaunchPad (for example, the transaction for booking invoices), thisapplication is executed in the WorkSpace on the right-hand side.

n Session handling in the Workplace allows you to hold several applications at the same time inchannels. The individual channels are displayed as icons in the In Use folder. By clicking on theentries, you can switch between the different applications.

n Using Drag&Relate you can link objects from one application with another with a simple mouseclick and execute them from there.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 38: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 16

SAP AG 1999

Active Applications (In Use)

mySAP.com Marketplace Update Personalize Getting Started Info

Welcome Julie ArmstrongIn UseStart Page

Workplace FavoritesRoles

Demonstration Role

Web Search

Search in Start Search

Optionen

Workplace Favorites Start Page General

Change Role Sequence

Standardsprache der Komponentensysteme

Allow More Than One Application in the Area “In Use“(Requires Restart of the Workplace)

Close Applications Without Confirmation

Display Dialog for Drag&Relate

Test

Language (for all Systems)

Client QW2/050

Logonlanguage

Logon language

OK Cancel

ActivateSession Handling

Initial Screen(MiniApps)

Personalize

The In Use area:

n You can manage multiple windows (Workplace Views) oin this folder in the LaunchPad. You canswitch from one Workspace View to another without affecting the applications that you are running.

n To be able to operate multiple Channels at the same time, you must change your personal settings forthe Workplace. Choose Personalize, and then the General tab. In the Options sections, check theoption Allow More Than One Application in the Area “In Use”. After this is activated, multipleparallel channels are available.

n In the example above, only the Start Page (“Home”) is shown in use, with an illustration of itsassigned MiniApps.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 39: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 17

SAP AG 1999

Workplace Favorites

mySAP.com Marketplace Update Personalize Getting Started Info

Welcome Julie ArmstrongIn UseStart Page

Workplace FavoritesRoles

Demonstration Role

Web Search

Search in Start Search

Delete

Apply

OK Cancel

Test

New FolderNew Web Address

Display in a separate browser window

Web Address http://help.sap.com

Name Online Documentation

Attributes Available in Roles

Favorite TransactionsWWW Addresses

Time MagazineInternational Herald Tribune

Workplace Favorites Start Page General

Workplace Favorites

Add Favorites usingDrag&Drop or Personalize

Test Web Pages andAdd them to the Favorites List

n You can personalize the LaunchPad using Favorites.

n By choosing Personalize (or by choosing the Personalize icon), you open a new window. You cancreate and (re)name your own folders in the left-hand part of the tab page Favorites, as well asmoving them and changing their grouping.

n You can enter Web addresses (URLs) in the right-hand part. These are then available in theFavorites folder in the LaunchPad. You should test your favorites by choosing the Test button beforeyou add them to your favorites list. A favorite that requires a complete browser window is notsuitable for displaying in the WorkSpace of the mySAP.com Workplace.

n You can see the entries in your LaunchPad that were assigned to you by your system administratoron the second tab page, Available in Roles. This contains, for example, transactions. If you use atransaction frequently, you can define this as a favorite. To do so, click the relevant transaction andchoose Add.

n You can also add to and edit your favorites directly form the LauchPad. Using Drag&Drop, you canadd frequently used transactions to the Favorites folder.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 40: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 18

SAP AG 1999

Personalizing MiniApps

mySAP.com Marketplace Update Personalize Getting Started Info

Welcome Julie ArmstrongIn UseStart Page

Workplace FavoritesRoles

Demonstration Role

Web Search

Search in Start Search

Workplace Favorites Start Page General

New MiniApp

LinesHeight

Test

Web Address http://www.sap.com/MiniApps

Name MiniApp Community

Attributes Available MiniApps

10 Minimized

OK Cancel

Apply

Displayed in Work Area

List View Layout Preview

Web Search

Reuters News

ZCALCULATOR

Hide

n MiniApps are Web applications or documents that are simple and intuitive to operate. After you havestarted the mySAP.com Workplace, they offer you a quick overview and access to the functions thatare most important to you on the initial screen.

n You are assigned the MiniApps in the Workspace by your system administrator, but you can also addyour own MiniApps.

n By choosing the menu option Personalize (or alternatively by choosing the Personalize icon), youopen a new window. You can add your own MiniApps on the right-hand side of the tab page StartPage under New MiniApps. Also enter the Web address (URL), a name for the MiniApp, and theheight in lines. Test MiniApps before adding them. You can easily rename and reassign them later.

n You can change and adjust the format of MiniApps. On the tab page MiniApps, you can change theorder in which the MiniApps are displayed on the Workplace or choose your desired display format(minimized or expanded).

n Take note of the address http://www.sap.com/miniapps. This is the homepage of the MiniAppcommunity. Here, you can find current information about available MiniApps in SAP systems andabout Internet services that you can add to those available in your Workplace.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 41: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 19

SAP AG 1999

Workplace: Advantages

l User-Friendlinessn Role-based accessn Tailored to match your needsn Access from anywhere

l Efficiencyn “Drag&Relate”n Uniform accessn Log on only once

l Opennessn Standard Internet user interfacen Components from SAP and

other providersn Extendable role specifications

l Low Total Costsn No installation expenses at

the PC workstationn Standardizationn Uncomplicated maintenance

l Securityn Central administrationn Controlled access

l Productivity

User Enterprise

n Both the user and the enterprise profit from the advantages of the mySAP.com Workplace.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 42: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 20

SAP AG 1999

You are now able to:

Navigation: Unit Summary

l Identify the elements of a typical window

l Navigate in the system

l Make personal system settings

l Describe and use the mySAP.com Workplace

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 43: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 21

Navigation - Exercises

Unit: NavigationTopic: Basic Functions

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

• Log on to an SAP R/3 System

• Find transaction codes

• Access the SAP Library

• Use F1 help to find field information

• Use F4 help to search for possible field entries

As a new user of an SAP R/3 System, you begin to navigate the systemusing the menu paths and transaction codes. You also begin to access thevarious types of online help.

All menu paths in the exercises refer to the SAP standard menu.

1-1 Logging on to the systemSelect the appropriate system for this course. Use the client, user name, initialpassword and logon language specified by the instructor. The first time you log on,you will get a prompt in which you must enter your new password, which youchoose yourself, twice. Make a note of the following:

Client: _ _ _ User: _ _ _ _ _ _ Password: ____________ Language: _ _.

1-2 What is the maximum number of sessions (windows in the SAP R/3 System) youcan have open simultaneously? __

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 44: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 22

1-3 Identify the functions and find the transaction codes that correspond to thefollowing menu paths in the SAP standard menu.

1-3-1 Tools→ Administration → Monitor → System Monitoring→ UserOverview

Name of function: ___________________________________________Transaction: _________________________________________________

1-3-2 Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable→

Master Records→ Display

Enter Customer 1000 and Company Code 1000 to go to the nextscreen.

Name of function: _____________________________________

Transaction: ___________________________________________

1-4 Help

1-4-1 If you choose Application help in the SAP Easy Access initial screen (Helpmenu), which area of the SAP Library does it take you to?

_________________________________________________________

To answer the questions below, you will need to go to the DisplayCustomer: Initial Screen.

1-4-2 Use F1 help on the Customer field. What is this field used for?Write a brief summary of the business-related information.

______________________________________________________

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 45: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 23

1-4-3 Use the F1 help on the Company code field. If you choose the Applicationhelp icon from the F1 help screen, which area of the SAP Library does ittake you to?

______________________________________________________

1-4-4 Which icon do you need to use on the F1 help screen to find the parameterID for the Company code field?

______________________________________________________

1-4-5 Use F4 help on the Customer field to find the customer number for Becker##. To do this, use the Search term "Becker*" after calling the F4 help.

Note: ## corresponds to your assigned group number.

___________________________________________________

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 46: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 24

Unit: NavigationTopic: User-Specific Settings

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

• Set a user parameter for a field

• Set user defaults

• Maintain your favorites

• Select a start transaction of your choice

You begin to set various user-specific settings.

Exercises marked * are optional.

2-1 Setting user parameters.

2-1-1 Assign a parameter value for the Company code field to your user profile.

Note: The instructor will tell you what parameter value to enter (for example1000). For information about defaults, see the notes on the slide User-Specific Personalization.

Parameter ID: ___ ___ ___

Parameter value: ___ ___ ___ ___

2-2 Defining User-Specific Settings using System → User profile → Own Data2-2-1 In your user profile, set your logon language to the value used for the

course.2-2-2 In your user profile, set the decimal notation and date format of your choice.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 47: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 25

2-3 Defining your favorites

2-3-1 Insert at least one new folder under the Favorites folder.2-3-2 Add any two of your favorite transactions to the corresponding folders.

2-3-3 Add the Internet address http://www.sap.com with the text SAPHomepage.

2-4* Setting a start transaction using the Extras menu.

2-4-1 Enter a transaction of your choice as the initial transaction. You will thenneed to log off and on again for the change to take effect.

Note: If desired, you can change the initial transaction back to the defaultvalue simply by deleting the transaction code that you entered.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 48: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 26

Navigation - Solutions

Unit: NavigationTopic: Basic Functions

1-1 Log on to the system specified by the instructor and change your initial password.

1-2 To open and close sessions, choose System → Create session (or use theappropriate icon) or System → End session.The maximum number of sessions you can have open simultaneously is six (6),depending on your system settings.

1-3 To find the transaction code, choose System → Status. These function names andtransaction codes correspond to the menu paths:

1-3-1 Transaction: SM04 for Function Name: User list1-3-2 Transaction: FD03 for Function Name: Display Customer: General Data

1-4 Help1-4-1 The section of the unit Getting Started that deals with using SAP Easy

Access is displayed.1-4-2 Suggestion: The customer is a unique key (account number) used to clearly

identify the customer within the system.

1-4-3 FI – Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable1-4-4 To find the Parameter ID: BUK, choose Technical Info1-4-5 Customer ## (## corresponds to your assigned group number)

When you select F4 in the Customer field, the Restrict Value Range windowappears. You can explore the various tabs to see the different search criteriaavailable. Find a tab that includes the Search term field and enter thefollowing:

Field Name Value

Search term Becker*

Choose Enter. A window appears listing the customer account numbers thatmatch your search criteria. Select the line that corresponds to Becker ##,then choose Copy. This automatically copies the customer account numberinto the Customer field.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 49: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 27

Unit: NavigationTopic: User-Specific Settings

2-1 Setting user parameters.2-1-1 To assign a parameter value to a field you will need the parameter ID of the

field. First you need to select a transaction that contains this field. Forexample, Company code can be found in transaction FD03. Next, place thecursor on that field (click it with the mouse). To display the required info,choose:

F1 → Technical Info → Parameter IDgives you the required information. For the Company code field, theparameter ID is BUK.

Finally, enter the parameter ID and desired value in your user profile:

System → User profile → Own dataOn the Parameter tab page you enter the parameter ID and value that youwant to be entered into the field. Save your entries.

2-2 Setting user defaults.2-2-1 To set the logon language, go to your user profile:

System → User profile → Own dataOn the Defaults tab page, enter the language of your choice in the Logonlanguage field.

2-2-2 To set the decimal notation and date format, remain on the Defaults tab inyour user profile. Select the indicator adjacent to the notation and formatyou desire. Save your selections.

2-3 Defining favorites of your choice.

2-3-1 Favorites → Insert folderType any name for the folder then select Enter. You can add as manyfolders as you desire. Once created, folders can be dragged and dropped toposition them where you want.

2-3-2 To create favorites, select specific applications (transactions) that you needas favorites for your daily work from the menu tree of the SAP standardmenu. Add them to your Favorites list by selecting them and choosingFavorites → Add from the menu bar. Alternatively, use the mouse to drag &drop favorites to a folder. You can also use the menu path Favorites →Insert transaction to add using a transaction code.. Finally, you can moveexisting favorites to different folders later by choosing Favorites → Moveor using drag & drop.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 50: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 28

2-3-3 Create Internet addresses by choosing Favorites → Add Web address orfile. When you select SAP Homepage from your favorites, an Internetbrowser will open and you will be connected to SAP’s homepage.

2-4 Setting a start transaction.

2-4-1 Extras → Set start transactionEnter a transaction of your choice then choose Enter. Notice the systemmessage on the status bar indicates that your selected transaction has beenset as the start transaction. The next time you log on, the system will godirectly to your start transaction.Note: To change back to SAP Easy Access as the initial screen, follow themenu path again, delete the transaction code and select Enter. The next timeyou log on, SAP Easy Access will be the initial screen.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 51: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview

Contents:

l SAP Treasury Overview

l Defining the Organizational Framework

l Selection of Financial Instruments

l Identifying Treasury Processes

l Treasury Management Functions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 52: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Provide an overview of SAP R/3 Treasuryl Identify the relevant product typesl Explain the various processes and standard functions

of SAP Treasury

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 53: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

SAP Treasury OverviewSAP Treasury Overview

Liquidity Management in the Shortand Medium Term

Introduction

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term

Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 54: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview: Business Scenario

l Before you begin your work in the project team,you want to gain an overview of SAP R/3Treasury.

l Which products and processes can be mappedusing the new Treasury system? Whatfunctions are available?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 55: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview

Financial Accounting

Bank data

Businesspartner

Market data

DownloadMarket Risk Management:• Interest/currency

exposure• Sensitivities• Mark-to-market• Risk analysis/Simulation• Value at Risk

Cash Management:• Electronic banking• Liquidity status• Integrated operationalsystems

• Control functions

Transaction Management:• Management of financialtransactions and positions

• Transfer to FinancialAccounting

• Flexible reporting andportfolio analysis

• Datafeed interface

DD CC DD CC100100100100

TMTM

SecuritiesSecuritiesDerivativesDerivatives

Money market Money market ForexForex LoansLoans

Logistics

n The objective of the SAP Treasury module is to ensure efficient liquidity, portfolio, and riskmanagement.

n SAP Treasury is subdivided into the following three areas:

Cash Management (CM) offers tools for efficient liquidity analysis.

Transaction Management (TM) supports the management of financial transactions and positions.

Market Risk Management (MRM) provides methods and procedures for assessing risk positions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 56: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

Treasury inconjunction withother SAP modules(FI, MM, SD)

Electronic bankingCash Management

Money marketSecurities

Loans

Foreign exchangeDerivatives

SAP Support for Business Requirements

Data integrationCentraldecision-makingSeveral currenciesAutomatic processesAnalysis of financialresourcesInvestment / borrowing

Data entryMonitoringProcessingReporting

Risk management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 57: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 7

SAP AG 1999

1. Definition of a means/end hierarchyl Define earnings and risk targetsl Establish investment and risk guidelinesl Implement in the form of operating targets

2. Definition of procedurel Identify the processesl Company-specific modeling of work processesl Break down into single activities and assign to groupsl Incorporate in an authorization and release concept

Defining the Organizational Framework

n Management is responsible for defining the framework within which treasury transactions areexecuted. This is divided into three main areas:

n Specifying the basic business principles, including:

ü Trading strategies for the respective instruments

ü The markets on which trading is allowed

ü Transaction volume, organization (contract components), and documentation

n Risk limitation, including:

ü Procedures for measuring and controlling risk

ü Value of the permitted risk positions according to instruments or organizational units

ü Reaction to extreme market trends or exceeded limits

ü Internal reporting

n Organization, including:

ü The areas of responsibility and functions of individual employees

ü Division into function areas

ü Human resources and technical equipment

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 58: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 8

SAP AG 1999

Investment and Risk Guidelines

Internal External

Revenuetargets

Risktargets

Investmentregulations

Riskregulations

LimitsRelevantproduct types

Hedgingstrategies

Reportingsystem

Investment andrisk guidelines

n In the financial services area, there are countless statutory norms and controlling bodies that monitorentered risks to protect the investor.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 59: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 9

SAP AG 1999

Selection of Financial Instruments

n Mortgageloans

n Borrower'snote loans

n Policy loansn Other

loans

n Fixed-termdeposits

n Deposits atnotice

n CommercialPaper

Product types

DerivativesForexLoansSecuritiesMoney market

n Stocksn Subscription

rightsn Investment

certificatesn Bondsn Convertible

bondsn Warrant bondsn Warrants

n Forexspotdeals

n Forwardexchangedeals

n Forex swaps

n Caps / Floorsn FRAsn Swaps

- Interest rate- Interest rate curr.

n OTC options - Currency - Interest rate - Security - Swaption

n Futures

Hedginginstruments

Investment/Borrowinginstruments

n In the short-term area, money market transactions and forex transactions allow you to bridgeliquidity deficits or surpluses. In the medium to long-term area, investments and borrowings areadditionally represented by securities transactions and loan transactions.

n Derivative financial instruments, on the other hand, help you hedge against interest rate and currencyrisks.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 60: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 10

SAP AG 1999

Hedging

HedgingHedging

Hedgingstrategy

Hedgingrate

Hedgingobject

Overall position

Portfolio position

Single position

Macro hedge

Portfolio hedge

Micro hedge

Full hedge 100%

Partial hedge x%

* Release not yet specified

n Hedging is a way of counteracting risk. It involves setting up an offsetting position, which developsin the opposite way to the underlying position.

n Risk objects are either cash flows resulting from an operating business or from Treasurytransactions/positions such as loans, securities, or money market transactions.

n Exchange rates, interest rates and volatilities are all sources of risk.

n You can match risk and hedged items and hence determine hedged and non-hedged items using theMarket Risk Management component.

n Hedge transactions are usually forward transactions (symmetrical instruments) or options(asymmetrical instruments) as well as combinations of these.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 61: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 11

SAP AG 1999

Earnings/risk targets

Revision of planned targets

Feedback

Adjustments

Documentation and control functions

Analysis and trading process

Transaction and positionmanagement process

Analysis(planning)

Decision

FinancialFinancialtransactionstransactions

Identifying Treasury Processes

n From a strategic point of view, the analysis and trading process is the starting point for the variousTreasury processes. At this stage, you identify and analyze the liquidity and risk positions on thebasis of the risk and earnings targets you have defined. SAP Treasury provides special tools andmethods with which you can perform an integrated analysis of your company's financial and risksituation.

n If you have decided to conclude certain financial transactions, you enter the trading processes forthese transactions in SAP Transaction Management (TM). Transaction Management also supportsfunctions for managing transactions and the related financial positions at later stages.

n All Treasury activities are supported by common documentation and control functions. This ensuresthat analyses of specific instruments or of various instrument groupings can be performed at eachstage of the Treasury process. This fulfills the various documentation and control requirements ofboth Financial Accounting and Treasury.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 62: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 12

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview: Unit Summary

l The SAP Treasury component is divided into threemain areas:- Cash Management,- Treasury Management / Loans Management- Market Risk Management.

l You can represent financial transactions in TreasuryManagement using different processes

l The SAP Treasury Management module includesfunctions that enable you to manage your financialtransactions from the trading stage through backoffice processing to Financial Accounting

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 63: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Management in the Short andMedium Term

Contents:

l Cash Management

l Money Market

l Foreign Exchange

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 64: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Provide an overview of the entire liquiditymanagement process in the short andmedium term

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 65: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

SAP Treasury Overview

Liquidity Management in the ShortLiquidity Management in the Short and Medium Termand Medium Term

Introduction

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk Positions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 66: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

Cash Management Functions

Our model company has to deal with the integration ofelectronic banking into Cash Management before it is in aposition to use the liquidity analysis options.The company has identified a liquidity surplus on its bankaccounts for a particular value date in Cash Management.A series of examples show us how this liquidity surplus cameabout and how it can be interpreted.On the one hand, it is worth noting the business causes behindthe individual cash flows, and on the other hand, their effect onthe system. Different cash flow views in different areas provideinformation about the company's overall liquidity situation, andthe short-term liquidity on its bank accounts.

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Cash Management Scenario

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 67: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

InformationprocurementInformation

procurementTargetsTargets

n Instrumentsn Methodsn Measurements

n Identification ofappropriatefinancialtransactions

n Simulationof alternativeresults

n Select onealternative

n Tradingn Back officen Accountingn Reporting

n Internal:- Liquidity status- Risk position

n External:Market data

Earnings/Earnings/risk targetsrisk targets

Assessmentof possiblesolutions

Assessmentof possiblesolutions

DecisionDecision Processingcontrol

Processingcontrol

Controlling

Analysis and Trading Process

n From a strategic point of view, the analysis and trading process is the starting point for the variousTreasury processes. At this stage, you identify and analyze the liquidity and risk positions on thebasis of the risk and earnings targets you have defined. SAP Treasury provides special tools andmethods with which you can perform an integrated analysis of your company's financial and risksituation.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 68: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

1) % of all companies surveyedSource: Price Waterhouse Top 500 Survey (Germany) 1994

1 Ensure liquidity 95

2 Optimize financing costs 92

3 Optimize yields on financial assets 74

4 Hedge costs (e.g. against possibleexchange rate fluctuations) 61

5 Hedge sales (e.g. against possibleexchange rate fluctuations) 52

6 Contribute to profit through activemanagement of open items 30

1)Priority Target %1)%1)

Main Targets of Treasury

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 69: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 7

SAP AG 1999

1 1 Ensure liquidityEnsure liquidity

using SAP Cash Management

Priority Target %

Liquidity Management

n The main tasks of a cash management system are:

ü To ensure the liquidity of a company

ü To analyze the business activities in closed posting periods

ü To recognize and map future trends in the financial planning as soon as possible.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 70: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 8

SAP AG 1999

Comprehensive valuation of liquidity situation

l Data from the operative systems: Financial Accounting,Logistics, and Treasury

l Electronic banking functions

l Cash position: Daily bank account balances by value date,payment advices

l Cash concentration: Concentrated bank account balances

l Cash pooling: Interest paid on bank accounts

l Liquidity forecast: Expected inflows/outflows fromcustomers and vendors, planned data

l Monitoring value dates, payment advices, conditions,checks cashed ...

Cash Management: Functions

n SAP Cash Management offers the following tools, designed to make cash flows clear:

ü The cash position, which illustrates short-term movements in your bank accounts

ü The liquidity forecast, which illustrates medium-term movements in the subledger accounts too.

n The cash position shows you how your bank accounts will move in the next few days. In contrast,the liquidity forecast illustrates liquidity changes in the subledger accounts. The system also supportsfunctions which you can use to obtain relevant information on expected payment flows. Thisinformation appears in the form of memo records in the cash position, or as planned items in theliquidity forecast.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 71: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 9

SAP AG 1999

Aim: Simplify bank account management

Cashed checks

Electronic and manual account statements

...

Establishing most current bank accountbalances to determine daily cash position

Electronic Banking: Functions

n SAP Cash Management has the same goals as conventional cash management systems, namely to:

• Safeguard company liquidity so that payment obligations can be met

• Monitor payment flows

n SAP Cash Management uses the cash position to reflect movements in bank accounts, whilemovements in the subledger accounts are represented using the liquidity forecast.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 72: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 10

SAP AG 1999

Dataadministration

lists

Subledgerdocuments

G/Ldocuments

Inputdata

Manual orelectronic entry

Temporarydataset

Electronic Banking: General Process

n External bank data is imported to the SAP System manually or electronically, and is initially storedin a temporary dataset for bank data. The system then generates the documents for the bank and/orsubledger accounting in addition to various lists.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 73: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 11

SAP AG 1999

Check deposit:l Entry of incoming checksl Storage/correction of check deposit listl Postings to G/L accounts and customer accountsl Batch input sessions or online

12001200CheckCheckOne thousand two hundredOne thousand two hundred

Walldorf,Walldorf,12/29/YY12/29/YY

11

11

22

22

Aut

omat

ic

Cash mgmt and forecast $, UNI, ...

Check deposit list

Incoming check clearing

Customer account

BankAcct statement(only bank postings)

OP 100

100 100

100

100

Session 1

+1day

Session 2

11

11

Electronic Banking: Check Deposit

n You can use the Check deposit facility in SAP Cash Management to enter checks received.

n The manual check deposit function is a fast entry tool that substantially reduces the amount ofmanual work involved in entering checks. You only enter the checks received, not the postingrecords.

n The system then automatically makes the postings to the bank clearing account and customeraccount, along with the payment clearing. You have two options here:

ü Immediate posting

ü Create a batch input session, then run it

n Postprocessing differs, according to which of these options you choose.

n When you have finished entering checks, there are additional functions you can use to process themfurther. For example, you can print out a check deposit list and give it to the bank along with thechecks.

n The check deposit list is written, but not posted, after the checks are saved to the database. You canmake changes in the list while it has this status. Once the posting process has been initiated, nofurther changes are possible.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 74: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 12

SAP AG 1999

Bankdata

Application-Application-specificspecificprocessingprocessing

Manualaccount

statement

Cash position and liquidity forecast

BanksSubledger

03/1510025

SWIFT MT940

MultiCash

Lockbox

BACS

ETEBAC

CODA

FIDES

CSB43

ZENGINKYO

EU

EU

USA

UK

F

BE

CH

E

JP

Czech Rep.

Sweden

Bankpostings

Subledgeraccounts

l Link to payment programl Automatic/manual account statements

n Various formats supportedn Postings to G/L and customer/vendor accounts

l Bank pollingn Current bank information polled

Electronic Banking

n Electronic bank statement processing in SAP Cash Management is based on the MultiCash format.Other formats are supported, such as SWIFT MT940 and BAI, but you are best advised to useMultiCash.

n The system uses the bank data to create two files (STATE.TXT and ITEM.TXT), which are thenimported into the SAP System, where more data is added. The system looks for the businesstransaction codes (BTC) and other information relevant to the posting (interpretation of the where-used fields).

n As with other Cash Management objects, you can work with batch input sessions or make postingsimmediately. The postprocessing activities differ accordingly.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 75: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 13

SAP AG 1999

Monitoring correct payments processingfor planning

Control Functions

Aim: Monitor bank account movements

l Compare value dates

l Reconcile payment advice andaccount/account statements

l Analyze cashed checks

l Account interest

l Compare bank conditions

n You use the value date comparison to compare the planned or agreed value date (for example, fromthe check deposit or the preliminary posting) with the value date posted by the bank in the bankstatement. The program searches for the balance sheet account postings relating to all the cleareditems in a bank clearing account. If there are any differences, the program lists both postings. If thereis more than one clearing item for a posting, the program takes the first one it finds.

n You can use the payment advice comparison to archive individual records which are no longer valid.This report selects payment advices from the selected planning period and compares them with thebank postings. If you work with the electronic bank statement and manual individual records, it isvital that you run the payment advice comparison.

• Compare with AccountThis section shows the manual and automatic comparison of individual records with accountpostings.

• Compare with Bank StatementThis section shows the manual and automatic comparison of individual records with bank datastore information, and the selection of archived records.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 76: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 14

SAP AG 1999

Banks 09/01 09/02 09/03

Grouping:

:

BANKA 90 130 60

Level: BANKA 09/01 09/02 09/03

F0 Subledger 40 80 20B2 Incoming checks 60 60 60B1 Outgoing checks 10- 10- 20-

Accounts: Subledger 09/01 09/02 09/03Account 1 10 30 10-Account 2 20 70 20-Account 3 10 20- 50

BANKB 40- 20- 30-

l Current bank account balances as per postingdate and value (bank postings and paymentadvices)

l Accounts managed in local/foreign currencyl Time scale 0-2 daysl Documentation and audit functions

Current liquidity position on bankaccounts per specific date

Cash Position

n The cash position reproduces the activity in your bank accounts for the next few days, and is theresult of the entry, by value date, of all the payments in a given, short time horizon.

n It is fed by three sources:

• FI postings to G/L accounts that are relevant to cash management

• Memo records entered manually

• Cash flows from business transactions managed with the Transaction Management component.

n You use the grouping to set up the display.

n There are different presentation graphics in the cash position. For example, the chart displays therelevant balance.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 77: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 15

SAP AG 1999

l The company code is an independent accounting unit.Legally required balance sheets and profit and lossstatements are prepared at this level.

l Levels describe the logical origin and significance of cashflows in business terms.

l Accounts (cash position) and groups (liquidity forecast)describe how payments are allocated.Examples:n Account: DBGIRO describes the expected incoming/outgoing

payments for a current account.

n Groups: Domestic customers describes the expected incoming/outgoing payments within the groupof domestic customers.

Structure/Views of Liquidity Analysis

n The format of the cash position and the liquidity forecast is determined by two features:

n Both reports contain levels. These supply high-quality information on the commercial reasons for amovement in an account - that is, they explain how the account opening and closing balances cameabout. For example, levels tell you whether a balance in a bank account is the result of a bankposting or of a memo record entered manually.They can also be classified according to how secure the receipt is - for example, by confirmed orunconfirmed memo record.

n In the cash position, accounts (bank and bank clearing accounts) supply information on the currentbalance.

n The total balance of a bank is subdivided according to

l Groups (= accounts) to which postings are made. These are listed mainly with their cashmanagement account name (Customizing).If the ‘Account instead of account name’ parameter isselected, the accounts are listed instead of the cash management account names.

l Levels (= cause) of a bank/account movement.

n The liquidity forecast contains groups instead of accounts. Customers and vendors are assigned to aplanning group by means of an entry in the master records. Each group reflects certain features,procedures, or risks.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 78: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 16

SAP AG 1999

External bank 4External bank 3

Company 2Company 2Company code 2Company code 2

External banks

External bank 2

Company 3Company 3Company code 3Company code 3

CentralCentral Treasury TreasuryCompany codeCompany code 1 1

Company 4Company 4Company code 4Company code 4

Liquidity statusCompany codes 2+3

Liquidity statusCompany codes 1-4

internal financialtransactions

external financialtransactions

external financialtransactions

Corporate Group Evaluations

n Alongside the chart of accounts, the company code is the main element for integration to SAPFinancial Accounting. A company code is the smallest organizational unit for which a set ofaccounts can be drawn up for external reporting purposes. This includes recording all the activitiesthat require posting, and preparing all the legally-required documents, such as balance sheets andprofit and loss statements.

n If you use the company code as an evaluation unit, you can reproduce different corporate structures,and therefore reflect the different entities within a corporate group.

n You can define each company division (e.g. subsidiary or central Treasury department) as acompany code.

n You can perform liquidity and risk analyses for each company code (that is, for each individualcompany) and also across all company codes (from a corporate group viewpoint).

n This enables you to display the foreign currency exposure of a subsidiary and the overall groupposition. In other words, you can display a currency-specific total position for all the subsidiaries.However, this does not include settling receivables and payables for specific company codes.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 79: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 17

SAP AG 1999

Status Status beforebefore concentrationconcentration afterafter concentrationconcentrationBank 1 1200 5Bank 2 100 5Bank 3 400 1337Bank 4 -350 3

1350 1350

Cash Concentration

l Clearing proposal on the basis of selection criterial Interactive manual adjustmentl Credit transfers and correspondence

Concentrated bank accounts

n Having established your liquidity situation from the cash position of the bank accounts, it is time totransfer any resulting deficits and surpluses to one account, for example, to the account you use formaking financial investments. The aim of cash clearing is to concentrate the balances of variousbank accounts in one target bank account, while also taking the defined minimum amounts intoconsideration. At the same time, the information in Cash Management has to be updated to generatethe related payment advices automatically, and to initiate the necessary bank transfers.

n If you use the Cash Management component throughout your corporate group, you can also use thecash concentration function for currency-related cash concentration across all subsidiaries. In thiscase, you can use the function for generating payment advices automatically to transfer the necessarypayments between the subsidiaries.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 80: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 18

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Forecast

France (E4)

(E2) Bank collection(E1)

Payer of net amount

(E3)

FI =Posting/salesFW =Bill of exchangeXA =Blocking reason 'A'

Groups:- Customers with similar payment history- Customers of particular interest

Groups:- Customers with similar payment history- Customers of particular interest

Levels:- Balances specified according to level

Levels:- Balances specified according to level

(E5)(E5)

l Integrated data basis including customers, vendors,and planned items

l Expected cash inflows/outflows over a time scaleof 1-24 weeks

l Support for optimizing financial investments andborrowings

Monitoring liquidity situation

n The liquidity forecast reproduces the liquidity movements in the subledger accounts.

n The incoming and outgoing payments per open item from accounts receivable and payable form thebasis of the liquidity forecast. Since planning and forecasting these payments is usually long term,the probability of payment being made on the planned day is less than the payment probability statedin the cash position.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 81: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 19

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Cash Management Functions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 82: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 20

SAP AG 1999

Cash position Liquidity forecast

Bank accountsin currency:Account 1 :Account nTotal

Paymenttransactions intransition:- incoming- outgoing

Financialinvestmentsand borrowings

Subledgers:- A/R- A/P- Purchase orders- Orders

TRADINGCash

managementdecision

Market information

Cash Position and Liquidity Forecast

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 83: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 21

SAP AG 1999

Cash position Liquidity forecast

TRADINGCashmanagement

decision

Market information

LogisticsFinancials

G/LG/Laccountsaccounts

Customers/Customers/vendorsvendors

TreasuryTreasury MM/SDMM/SDFIFIFIFI

TR-TMTR-TM OrdersOrders

Integration with Other SAP Modules

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 84: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 22

SAP AG 1999

Treasury Management FunctionsThis unit gives you an overview of the Treasury Management functions.It presents the general analysis and trading process used as a basis forconcluding Treasury transactions. Managing Treasury transactions isthe basis for the transaction and position management process. Thisconsists of the following key phases:The “Trading” area includes functions for entering transactions andexercising rights, for supporting evaluations and calculating prices (e.g.option price calculator).In the “Back-office” area, you can complete the transactions (forexample, with account assignment information and payment details).You can also use correspondence functions, such as automatic lettersof confirmation. Position management functions for securities, forexample, securities account transfers or corporate actions are alsoincluded here.The "Accounting" area includes tools for updating the general ledger,as well as flexible functions for handling payment transactions, andvaluation and accrual/deferral procedures.

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term:Treasury Management Scenario

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 85: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 23

SAP AG 1999

Market RiskManagement

Priority Priority TargetTarget1 Ensure liquidity 952 Optimize financing costs 923 Optimize yields on financial assets 744 Hedge costs (e.g. against possible exchange rate fluctuations) 615 Hedge sales (e.g. against possible exchange rate fluctuations) 526 Contribute to profit through active

management of open items 30

TreasuryManagement

%

Treasury and Market Risk Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 86: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 24

SAP AG 1999

Earnings/risk targets

Revision of planned targets

Feedback

Adjustments

Documentation and control functions

Analysis andtrading process

Transaction and positionmanagement process

AnalysisAnalysis(planning)(planning)

DecisionDecision

FinancialFinancialtransactionstransactions

Identifying Treasury Processes

n From a strategic point of view, the analysis and trading process is the starting point for the variousTreasury processes. At this stage, you identify and analyze the liquidity and risk positions on thebasis of the risk and earnings targets you have defined. SAP Treasury provides special tools andmethods with which you can perform an integrated analysis of your company's financial and risksituation.

n If you have decided to conclude certain financial transactions, you enter the trading processes forthese transactions in SAP Transaction Management (TM). Transaction Management also supportsfunctions for managing transactions and the related financial positions at later stages.

n All Treasury activities are supported by common documentation and control functions. This ensuresthat analyses of specific instruments or of various instrument groupings can be performed at eachstage of the Treasury process. This fulfills the various documentation and control requirements ofboth Financial Accounting and Treasury.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 87: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 25

SAP AG 1999

n Create new offer/ order/contractn Exercise/expirationn Noticen Rolloversn Exercise rights

User authorizationLimit management

Release

n Settlement/controln Interest rate adjustmentn Nettingn Referencingn Confirmation lettersn Securities account transfersn Corporate actions

TradingTrading Back officeBack office AccountingAccounting

n Postingsn Payment transactionsn Reversalsn Accruals/deferralsn Valuation

Transaction and Position Management Process

n The basic structure of the trading and transaction management process is the same across theTreasury components. This forms the basis for integrating and processing transactions within theSAP System and provides the framework for adapting the way transactions are represented in thesystem to suit company-specific requirements.

n You can grant user authorizations for the various activities in the transaction and positionmanagement process. The authorization concept is specifically designed to allow you to assigndifferent authorization profiles to employees from different divisions. This enables you to separatetrading, back office, and accounting functions as needed.

n You can also define the release requirements for each processing step (such as further processing ofsecurities transactions) and you specify the transaction amounts that fall within the releaseprocedure. You can choose which release principle you want to use. In doing so, you specify foreach product and transaction type whether a special posting release is required.

n Besides enabling you to assign user authorizations to activity transitions, the limit managementfunction enables you to assign a range of different amounts to different transactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 88: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 26

SAP AG 1999

Treasury Management: Functions

l Complete financial transaction and positionmanagementn Support for trading and back-office functions

n Functions to track, check, and release transactions

n Data transfer to Financial Accounting(including accruals/deferrals and valuation)

l Flexible settings to accommodate company-specifictransaction and position management processes

l Financial transactions assigned to portfolios andmanaged in securities accounts

l Flexible reporting and portfolio analysis

l Datafeed interface

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 89: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 27

SAP AG 1999

Active Liquidity Management using Money MarketTransactionsOn the basis of the liquidity situation established in Cash Management, yourcompany decides to place a fixed-term deposit to shift the present excesscash flows to the future. In this example, you also see the various ways inwhich you can set up the transaction and position management processes fortreasury transactions. The basic concepts, such as product types or businesspartner, are explained in detail on the basis of this fixed-term deposit. Theexample covers all the stages involved in the process - from entering thetransaction in the trading area, to checking it in the back office area, through totransferring the data to Financial Accounting. From a process-oriented view,the interaction with Cash Management is extremely important: Treasurytransactions are always viewed in the context of their current statuses,ensuring that the cash manager has the most up-to-date information at hisfingertips. The example also outlines the typical reaction between the singlephases of a financial transaction and Cash Management. By shifting the cashflows to a future period, the example demonstrates how to bridge over futureanticipated liquidity shortfalls at the same time as smoothing out short-termliquidity gluts.

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Money Market Scenario

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 90: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 28

SAP AG 1999

n Fixed-termdeposits

n Deposits atnotice

n CommercialPaper

Product types

DerivativesForexLoansSecuritiesMoney market

Hedginginstruments

Investment/borrowinginstruments

Money Market: Product Types

n Money market transactions are for short- to medium-term investments or borrowings. You can makecash management decisions in the Money Market area based on the surpluses or deficits calculated inCash Management. In Cash Management, you can see the immediate impact your transactions haveon your company's liquidity (by value date at the time of the investment/borrowing and on the duedate).

n The product types in the Money Market area are:

- Fixed-term deposits (overnight deposits, time deposits)

- Deposits at notice

- Commercial Paper

- Cash flow transaction

n In the Money Market area, cash flow transactions allow you to represent a wide range of transactionsflexibly by manually entering not just the term, but also the cash flow generated for the transactionas a result of position changes, expenses, earnings, payments, and so on.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 91: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 29

SAP AG 1999

Transaction and Position Management Process:Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit

PostingsPaymenttransactionsAccruals/deferralsValuationReversals

Create new offer/contract Rollovers Reversals Transaction history

Settlement/control Netting Confirmation letters Reversals Transaction history

User authorizationlimit management

Release

TradingTrading Back officeBack office AccountingAccounting

n The sequence of events in Treasury transaction management can be divided into several stages:

ü You can create a money market transaction as an offer or directly as a contract.

ü The activity sequence is determined by the processing category you choose in Customizing(with/without settlement).

n Within transaction management, you can branch from each application to the partner managementfunctions to create business partners, display them, change them, and maintain their payment details.

n Each activity within transaction management (such as contract) can be analyzed in the cashmanagement and forecast function.

n You can enter offers for fixed-term deposits and for spot exchange and forward exchangetransactions in the Money Market area.

n You can create simulated transactions with the activity category simulation for foreign exchangetransactions and fixed-term deposits.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 92: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 30

SAP AG 1999

Trading: Entering a Fixed-Term Deposit

Financial transactionsl are assigned to the related organizational unit

(company code) within the entire companyn various organizational structures are possible for corporate groups

l are concluded with a business partnern internal and external (banks) business partners

l are concluded for a specific product/transaction typen product type and transaction type are user-definable

l can be created with different processing forms

n The Trading area contains the important functions for entering and changing transaction data. Torepresent transactions efficiently in the system, you first have to enter the following basic data:

Which organizational entity (company code) is concluding the financial transaction? In caseswhere the organizational structure of a company is more complex (for example, in centralTreasury management), this entry allows you to distinguish between different corporatedivisions.

Which financial transaction is being concluded? Here, you specify the product type,transaction type, and the related processing rules.

With whom are you concluding the financial transaction? Each transaction is linked to abusiness partner. The data entered for the business partner offers considerable scope forrationalization. If, for example, you always use the same bank and payment details with abusiness partner, these can be linked to the transactions automatically. You can also restrict therange of product types that may be traded with a business partner.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 93: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 31

SAP AG 1999

Creating Contract Data: Fixed-Term Deposit

Company code 1000 IDES AG

Product type

Transaction type

Partner

51A Fixed-term deposit EXTERN100 Investment

Deuba Deutsche Bank

SpecificationsCurrency

External number assignmentTransaction

Portfolio

instead of currency of comp. code

Mast. agreement

n The next section describes the following key terms and the related automatic functions in greaterdetail:- Company code- Product type- Transaction type- Business partner

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 94: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 32

SAP AG 1999

Organizational Units

Company codeCompany code

Controlling areaControlling area

Client Business areaBusiness area

SecuritiesSecuritiesaccountaccount

PortfolioPortfolio

n The Treasury modules use the central SAP organizational structures. This ensures the integration ofthe Treasury system with the other SAP applications.

n A client is a closed entity within an SAP System from a commercial, organizational, and technicalviewpoint. It has separate master records and its own record of tables. Client data can be used by allcompany codes and all organizational structures. The client usually represents the corporate group.

n A company code (FI) is the smallest organizational unit for which a complete set of accounts can bedrawn up for external reporting purposes. The company code is the unit for which you record all theposting activities and generate all the statements for individual accounts (balance sheet, profit andloss account).A client can include several company codes, which enables you to manage the accounts for severalindependent companies at the same time.

n Business areas (FI) are organizational units of internal financial accounting. You manage thepayment transactions for G/L accounts here for internal evaluation purposes (internal balancesheet/P&L). You can define business areas across all company codes.

n Controlling areas (CO) are organizational units within an enterprise for which you can performcomprehensive cost accounting.

n You can make further subdivisions in SAP Treasury by defining Treasury-specific evaluationgroups, such as portfolios and securities accounts. You can assign your own financial transactionsto portfolios / securities accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 95: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 33

SAP AG 1999

Basic Principles of Transaction Management (1)

USER LEVEL

- Fixed-termdeposit

- Forex- CAP/FLOOR- Interest rate swap- Currency swap :

510 Fixed-termdeposit

600 Forex610 CAP/FLOOR620 SWAP

- Investment- Borrowing- Spot- Forward- Purchase- Sale- Swap :

100 Investment200 Borrowing

:

10 Contract

11 Rollover:

1 Order-Contract- Settlement2 Contract3 Contract- Settlement

SYSTEM LEVEL

Product categoryProduct category Transaction categoryTransaction category Activity categoryActivity category Processing categoryProcessing category

Product typeProduct type Transaction typeTransaction type

n Product categories cover the various basic categories of financial borrowing and investmenttransactions and are used to classify the financial instruments. Product categories are predefined inthe system and apply for all company codes. They cannot be modified by the user. Product typesrepresent a refinement of product categories at user level and, unlike the product categories, they areuser-defined.

n The financial transaction type is fundamental to the processing of financial transactions, since itdetermines the types of transactions that can be managed with a certain product type. User-specificvalues for financial transaction types are determined on the basis of predefined financial transactioncategories. You can define your own values in the Money Market, Foreign Exchange, Derivatives,and Securities areas. In the Loans area, the transaction types are represented in the system internally.

n When you process a transaction, it undergoes a series of activities that are indicated by the activityinformation. Activity categories are predefined in the system.

n You can set up the processing sequence of a financial transaction using processing categories.Processing categories are also predefined in the system and describe the processing steps you have tofollow - from entering a transaction through to processing it in accounting.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 96: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 34

SAP AG 1999

Business Partner - Roles and Functions

BorrowerAgent/counterpartyLawyerSurveyor

Naturalperson

Organization

IssuerDepository bankTrusteePayer/payeeAssigning instituteGuarantor

Interested party Treasury partner

Beneficiary

n A business partner is either

- a natural person

- an organization

- a group of people or an organization in which a business interest exists.

n In Treasury, you conclude transactions with business partners. Banks, brokers, or central treasurydepartments are all examples of typical business partners.

n You create a data master record for each business partner.

n You can assign several roles/functions to each business partner.A role (= role category) is a specification of the characteristics a business partner must have beforecertain business transactions can be processed with that business partner. The functions of thebusiness partner in the transaction are defined via business partner roles.Example: A business partner acts as a borrower or a Treasury partner.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 97: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 35

SAP AG 1999

Company codedata

General roledata

Role overviewRole data

Credit standingTax data

Reporting dataControl

Bank

Account managementAccount interest

Autom. pmnt transact.Payment dataDunning data

Reporting dataControl

Relationships

Businesspartner

Central data

NameAddress overview

Bank detailsPersonal data

Employment dataLegal dataFiscal year

Additional dataRelationships

Business Partner - Data: Overview

n The user interface for the business partner data was redesigned as part of the Enjoy project. The newscreen layout that uses tab pages now means that you can navigate to the business partner betweenthe individual views. You can still navigate as before using the menu.

n The data you can maintain for business partners is divided into three areas:

- Central dataData is available for every business partner, regardless of the partner role.

- General role dataData is held centrally for all roles. Access to this data can vary according to the role category,depending on the settings in Customizing (role-view-assignment).

- Company code-dependent dataData that only applies for a particular role category in a certain company code.

n Each of these areas is divided into different views:Example: The "central data" area contains 9 views: Name, address overview, bank details, -...

n The standing instructions relating to the payment details, correspondence, authorizations and derivedflows are integrated in the master data of the business partner.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 98: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 36

SAP AG 1999

Traderauthorization

Business partnerauthorizationTrader and business partner

AuthorizationTreasuryTreasuryMoney marketMoney market

Fixed-term deposit

51 A Fixed-term deposit100 investment200 borrowing

Deposit at notice

52 A Deposit at notice 100 investment 200 borrowing

Authorization

Business Partner and Trader Authorization

n You use transaction authorizations to control which transactions can be concluded with a particularbusiness partner. Business partner authorizations automatically guarantee that financial transactionscan only be concluded with business partners that have the necessary authorization. You can assigntransaction authorizations at the following levels:

l Contract type

l Product category

l Product type

l Transaction type

n You have to assign authorization explicitly to each business partner in each company code.

n When you assign transaction authorizations for traders, you can restrict the trading powers to certainfinancial instruments (such as money market or foreign exchange), product categories, product types,or transaction types. A higher-level authorization means that a trader is allowed to create anytransaction below this level. For example, a trader, who is authorized for the Money Market area, canautomatically conclude a fixed-term deposit or a deposit at notice.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 99: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 37

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Creating a New Business Partner

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 100: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 38

SAP AG 1999

Company code IDES AG

Product type Fixed-term deposit EXTERN

Transaction type Investment

Business partner ...

Investment Term

Flow type Principle increase Start

Amount End

Interest structure

Percentage rate

Int. calc. meth.

...

Creating a Fixed-Term Deposit: Structure

Structure StatusManagement Other flows Payment details Cash flow Memos

1000

51A100

1100

1M UNI -

08/10/YY

++2

2.6act/360

Tab pages for navigation

n When you create a financial transaction, the system automatically generates flows. For example,when you create a fixed-term deposit, the system generates principal increase, nominal interest, andfinal repayment flows.

n The structure tab contains information that relates purely to the product types, such as the amount,term, and interest structure. Here, you can use various key codes for entering amounts and dates (forexample, M = million, T = thousand, 0 = today, ++2 = 2 months).

n From here, you can branch to the entry screens for general transaction management functions. Usingthe tab pages, you can navigate between the different screens.

Administration: Information on portfolio assignment, account assignment references for position postings.Other flows: You can add information to the flows generated automatically by the system on the other flows screen (such as charges, commissions).Status: Information on correspondence, activities, release status....

n On the payment details tab, you enter the relevant payment details for this transaction. If you havemaintained the payment methods as standing instructions, these appear as proposals that you cancorrect yourself.

n As well as the the main flows you enter at the start of term or on the rollover date for fixed-termdeposits and deposits at notice, you can enter other changes to the capital structure during the term.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 101: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 39

SAP AG 1999

n Entry and editing functions- Standing instructions- Copying functions- Shortcuts and tree structures- Fast entry- Collective/fast processing

n Field selection control

Market dataPartner

Transaction partnerTransaction partnermanagementmanagement

Standing instructions

n Transaction authorizationsn Payment detailsn Correspondencen Derived flows

n Automatic checks- Working day checks- Trader and business partnerauthorization

n Valuation tools- NPV calculator- Option price calculator

n Dealing slipsn Change documents

Optional: OfferOptionalOptional: : OfferOffer ContractContractContract

MarketMarketdatabasedatabase

Trading Support

n Traders can use a whole range of practical functions to optimize trading. These include utilities, dataentry monitoring functions, as well as other features to make trading easier, such as:

l Fast entry screens for the most common transactions.

l Entry codes (for amounts and due dates) and default values for fields.

l Proposals for prices/rates and swaps, net present value calculator, multicurrency system.

l Notebook functions for the trading, back office, and accounting areas.

l Date check (to determine whether the requested due date falls on a working day).

l Securities area: option to branch directly to the securities account overview.

l Option price calculator to enable you to compare the option prices offered with your owncalculations based on market data.

n Using the field selection control, you can can access the majority of fields and determine which ofthem you want to display. You can set up how the display screens for TR Transaction Managementappear to suit the business conditions. You group the visible fields into field groups according to thebusiness criteria. You can assign an attribute to each of the field groups available to determine whatthe user sees. This enables you to hide field groups, display them, or define them as required entries.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 102: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 40

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions: Cash Flow

ACTUALACTUAL

Investment 4/1/YY 1m UNI made

Interest 7/1/YY 10,000 UNI anticipated

Repayment 7/1/YY 1 m UNI anticipated

Cash flow (example)Cash flow (example)

TransactionTransactionAmountinvested/borrowed

Amountinvested/borrowed

ConditionConditionPLANNEDPLANNED

Basis forn Updating Cash Management

n Updating FinancialAccounting using flexibleaccount determination

n Payment triggering

n Item updating

n Accrued/deferred interest

n Foreign currency valuation

n Yield calculation

n The cash flow for financial transactions is used as the basis for all trading, transaction and positionmanagement processes, as well as for the evaluation activities within Treasury.

n Financial mathematics are used to determine cash flows in Treasury.

n The system provides a range of formulas based on the "building block principle" that take intoaccount the flexible organization of the Treasury application.

n In Treasury Management, application-specific control programs are used to call up central financialmathematical function modules, for example, to calculate the interest and repayment schedules.

n On the basis of the conditions belonging to a financial transaction and the specified calculationperiod, these function modules for financial mathematics generate and, if required, calculate a seriesof payment flows for the transaction in the application (for example, stock purchase, swap). Thisseries of flows is known as the cash flow.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 103: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 41

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transaction Architecture

Product type

Transaction type

Business partner

Transfer flow

Valuation flow

Accrual/deferral flow

Flows describingstructure characteristics

Paymentinformation

Postinginformation

Calculationbases

Curre

ncie

sBal.

she

et a

cct

Gen. infoGen. info

Inte

rest

Repa

ymnt

ConditionsConditions

Cas

h flo

w

n When you create a financial transaction, the system uses the structure characteristics of thetransaction, the conditions types, and the flow types to determine the cash flow. This cash flowcontains all the information that is relevant to the transaction in the form of flow records. Forinstance, the amount invested, the interest payments, or the repayment methods are concentrated inone or more flow records. The transaction cash flow is made up of flow records which can begenerated in various ways:

- Flows entered manually, such as disbursements or charges.

- Derived flows generated from the conditions (via the flow types assigned to the condition type)and from flows entered manually. These can be interest flows, repayment flows, accruedinterest, or price/rate gains.

- Flows calculated by special programs. This category includes, for example, write-downs orinterest accruals/deferrals.

- Accruals/deferrals of earnings and expenses generated from transaction expenditures andrevenues.

- Valuation of transactions, for instance, to calculate price gains and losses from foreign currencytransactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 104: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 42

SAP AG 1999

Condition Types/Flow Types

USER LEVEL

AA - InflowTD - Dividend

InterestRepayment

:

AA - InflowTD - Dividend

Condition group 01: StockCondition group 02: Floater

- Expected dividend- Bonus paid- Variable interest- Repayment- Interest rateadjustment

- Repayment price :

1000 - Purchasesecurity

5013 - Dividend

SYSTEM LEVEL

Condition/Flow categoryCondition/Flow category CalculationCalculationcategorycategory

Flow typeFlow typeCondition typeCondition typeProduct typeProduct type

Transaction typeTransaction type

Condition groupCondition group

Product categoryProduct category

TransactionTransactioncategorycategory

n Flow types explain the possible changes to the cash flows. Flows are the basis for generating the cashflow in financial mathematics and are used for valuing the cash flow, further processing, and posting.Typical flow types are fixed or floating interest, increases in nominal amounts, or commissions. Eachflow type is assigned to exactly one flow category. However, several flow types can be assigned tothe same flow category. For example, the flow types for fixed interest and floating interest areassigned to the flow category "interest".

n Cash flows and postings are controlled by two indicators, which you have to assign to each flowtype. The flow category controls the way the flow is processed for accounting purposes. Thecalculation category controls the cash flow processing.

n Examples of flow categories include accounting flows, such as inflow (security purchase), outflow(repayment), expense or revenue. Flows relevant for generating the cash flow include securitypurchase/sale, interest, repayment, or charges.

n Condition categories represent the financial mathematical basis of product types and the relatedfinancial transactions. They also represent a further classification of flows and conditions, and theirrelated financial transactions. Condition categories are used to interpret the significance of conditionsin business economic terms. Examples of condition types include principal increases, finalrepayments, nominal interest, or different premiums, such as option premiums. You can define yourcondition types on the basis of the condition categories, and assign them to the respective producttype.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 105: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 43

SAP AG 1999

Assign planning levels

IDES AG

10/02 10/03 10/03 later10/05

Cash Management: Display Levels

LeBanksBanks

Description 10/02 10/03 10/04 later10/05

TB Time depositsTime deposits 132,323 xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxxxxx,xxx. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

OBOB Currency optionsCurrency options xxx,xxx. . .. . . . . . . . .

DBDB ForexForex

Balance

. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

1000

Fixed-term deposit51A

Time deposits - banksTB

Contract10

xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

Financial Transactions in Cash Management

n Each activity (status) within a business transaction (contract, settlement, etc.) is displayed in CashManagement automatically (with the exception of orders). You can view and analyze the activityusing a separate level, if required.

n When you enter a transaction, the cash flows generated by the transactions (irrespective of whetherthey have already been posted) can be seen immediately in Cash Management and can be used forplanning purposes.

n In Customizing, you have to maintain the planning levels at which you want to display yourinformation for G/L accounts and/or subledger accounts. You do this for each of the relevant producttypes and activity categories (statuses).

n If you want to compare the operational data with the Treasury transactions in the context of MRMevaluations (for example, in exposure reports), you must create groupings that do not contain anyTreasury transactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 106: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 44

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Integrating Trading Functions toCash Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 107: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 45

SAP AG 1999

Cash Flows in Cash Management

Cash flow: Treasury ManagementSept 01 1000- Fixed-term deposit 1,000Oct 01 1120+ Final repayment 1,000Oct 01 1200+ Nominal interest 200

E2 Domestic customers + UNI DB GIRUN- UNI DB GIRUN

Subledger accounts Sept 01 Oct 01 Bank accountsTB Bank deposits/loans - 1000 + 1200 TB Bank deposits/loans

E2 Domestic customers DBGIRUN

Alternative 1Payment details not known

Alternative 1Payment details not known

Alternative 2Payment details known

Alternative 2Payment details known

Business partnerPlanning groups

Business partner / Financial transactionPayment details and house banks

n When you update financial transactions in Cash Management, you have two options:

n Alternative 1:If no payment details have been maintained in the transaction, in other words, the bank accounts arenot known, you cannot display the cash flow for a bank (clearing) account. However, to enable youto display the cash flow in CM, the system displays the amount relating to the subledger accounts.The system takes the planning group entered in the master record for the business partner.

n Alternative 2:If the payment details for a transaction are known, in other words, the bank accounts are known, thecash flow is displayed in CM at the level that is assigned to the corresponding bank (clearing)account.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 108: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 46

SAP AG 1999

Collective Processing: Money Market

l Overview of money market transactions that correspondto the selection criteria entered

l Process the relevant transaction

n Createn Changen Displayn Roll overn Give noticen Settlen Reversen History

l Branch directly to the individual transaction

l Connection to the SAP List Viewer

n The collective processing function helps you to manage your transactions systematically bydisplaying a list of all the transactions with common selection criteria. The list includes keyinformation about each transaction as well as a range of processing functions.

n From this processing list, you can branch to the individual transactions.

n The link to the SAP List Viewer provides you with a whole range of display options. You canstructure your list by column or row, sort the list, and display totals. You can save these displayvariants and use them later on.

n When you have finished processing a transaction, a processing indicator is set.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 109: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 47

SAP AG 1999

Transaction Management:Worklist and Collective Processing

l Processing financial transactions for all productcategories

l Managing financial transactions for specific users

l Selecting and displaying Treasury transactions

l Branching to individual processing for transactions

l Displaying transactions using the SAP List Viewer

n You can process financial transactions for all the following product categories:

l Fixed-term deposits and deposits at notice

l Commercial Paper

l Cash flow transactions

l Spot/forward exchange transactions

l Interest derivatives

l OTC options

l Futures

l Securities

n You can store any number of selections as variants and manage them in collective processing in atree view for specific users or for all users.

n The layout controls how the list is structured. You can store the following information in one layout:

l Column layout

l Sort criteria

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 110: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 48

SAP AG 1999

Money Market - Fast Processing

Deuba UNI

1000 1

1,000.000 2.700 03/24/YY Payment Deutsche Bank

51A 100 Fix.-term

Deuba UNI

1000 2

10,000,000 2.900 03/25/YY Deutsche Bank

Deuba UNI

1000 3

5,500,000 2.800 03/25/YY Deutsche Bank

51A 100 Fix.-term

51A 100 Fix.-term

Total amount Int. rate End of term Int./Rollover Cap. Partner

New New New New New PTyp TTyp Name

Fixed-term deposits invested

Deposits at notice invested . . .

Partner Currency

CoCd Transaction

Payment

Payment

n When you use the Fast processing function, which lists a short overview of fixed-term deposits anddeposits at notice, you can add amount data, the interest rate, and the new end of term.

n This function enables traders to process the transactions they want to roll over or give notice onmuch more easily.

n This Fast entry function is restricted to certain key fields. It helps you save time by enabling you tocarry out the majority of the repetitive daily tasks on one screen.

n The fast-processing function for time deposits enables you to select and process fixed-term depositsand deposits at notice for several company codes in one step.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 111: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 49

SAP AG 1999

1. Specify release procedure

2. Define release conditions

3. Assign roles / users

SAP Business Workflow

n To use the workflow to release transactions, you must define release procedures and conditions, aswell as assign roles and users.

n Which procedure you choose depends on the settings you have made in Customizing for thecompany code, the product type, and the transaction type. You define release procedures andconditions for this purpose.

n In the release conditions screen, you enter the number of release steps and indicate whether a releaseis necessary for the particular activity category and activity.

n The Release steps field determines how many people have to release the object to complete therelease (for example: dual-control principle - 1 employee, 1 person responsible for release).

n You are free to set up the release restrictions yourself (for example, you can specify whetherprocessing is permitted during the release process).

n You have to create the users in the system for the individual approvals. You have the option ofcreating several users/positions who should be notified in cases where deadlines have been missed.

n You can also display a reporting overview that shows you which release was processed, when it wasprocessed, and by whom, for each Treasury transaction.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 112: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 50

SAP AG 1999

Transaction and Position Management Process:Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit

Create new offer/contract Rollovers Reversals Transaction history

Settlement/control Netting Confirmation letters Reversals Transaction history

User authorizationLimit management

PostingsPaymenttransactionsAccruals/deferralsValuationReversals

Release

TradingTrading Back officeBack office AccountingAccounting

n The back office area includes functions for controlling and changing transactions. When you settle atransaction, you also complete it and check it.

n You settle a contract in the back office area and can add any information that is relevant for postingand payment.

n When you save a settlement activity, the system changes the activity category of the transaction inorder to record how it is monitored and processed in the back-office area.

n If a transaction has the activity category "WITH settlement activities", you can only post the contractafter it has been settled.

n The characteristics for a specific company are based on modelling these types of activity chains,where the processing sequence of transactions is managed by activity categories or status transfers.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 113: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 51

SAP AG 1999

Back Office

CorrespondenceCorrespondence

Accounting

n Collective processingn Nettingn Referencingn Interest rate changesn Securities account

transfersn Capital change

activities

n Confirmationmanagement(incoming/outgoing)

Payment details

Curr. Bank Acct

. . . . . . ...

n Settlement/controln Payment details

Back officeBack office

Confirmation Confirmation

ManagingManagingpositionspositions

TransactionTransactionprocessingprocessing

n Depending on the structure of your company, you can transfer financial transactions you haveentered in the Trading area to the Back office area. The back office area includes functions forcontrolling and changing transactions. The key aspects of postprocessing are as follows:

ü Adding transaction data to include other data that is relevant for processing.

ü Preparing postings and payments, for example, controlling the accounts that are used later in theautomated processes. This is your last opportunity to assign an account assignment reference andpayment details to your transaction.You need this information to be able to post the Treasury flows to Financial Accounting (seeaccount assignment reference).

ü Generating Correspondence in the form of dealing slips, confirmation letters, or confirmationfiles.

ü Position management tasks, such as securities account transfers.

n When you save a settlement activity, the system changes the activity category of the transaction inorder to record how it is monitored and processed in the back office area.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 114: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 52

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners: Standing Instructions

Business partner ABusiness partner A

PaymentPaymentdetailsdetails

TransactionTransactionauthorizationsauthorizations

DerivedDerivedflowsflowsCorrespondenceCorrespondence

n Standing instructions are general agreements made with a business partner for processing similartypes of transactions. You can access the business partner standing instructions for payment details,correspondence, authorizations and derived flows using the tabs on the business partner maintenancescreen. The integration of the standing instructions with the business partner data means that therelease workflow for business partners can also be applied to the standing instructions. You can alsoaccess the standing instructions using a separate menu path.

n Agreements can cover:

ü AuthorizationsWhich financial transactions may be concluded with this partner?

ü Payment detailsFor transactions with business partner A ==> The system proposes the payment details for

business partner A in the transaction

ü CorrespondenceFor transactions with business partner A ==> Fixed setting: Which correspondence is

generated for which transactions?

ü Derived flowsFor transactions with business partner A ==> Fixed setting: If the transaction with business

partner A contains flow X, add taxes amounting to y% of X.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 115: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 53

SAP AG 1999

Correspondence

E.g. Confirmationletters, via fax, e-mail,SWIFT, IDOC

Fax

E.g. Dealing slips

External InternalConfirmation Confirmation

n Correspondence is a means of recording and matching the transactions you have concluded.

n You can define your correspondence using either internal (e.g. dealing slips) or external (e.g.confirmations) correspondence types. This allows you to confirm all the transactions you haveconcluded with a business partner over a certain period of time in one correspondence run. You caneither print out the data or send it directly from the system by telefax. You also have the option ofsending the confirmation by e-mail or IDoc. To send e-mails, the communication interfaceSAPconnect must be set up. The correspondence function supports the generation of SWIFT filesMT320 for fixed-term deposits and MT300 for foreign exchange transactions. With the help of auser exit, you can use FX match for outgoing confirmations.

n You control the timing of the correspondence in Customizing for product types, transaction types,and activities. You can also specify whether you want the correspondence to be generatedautomatically when you create, change, or reverse a transaction, in other words, when you save it.Correspondence that has been generated is stored in the financial transaction data.

n The confirmation status (that is, the information about the time, the activity, the processor, the formused, and the output medium for incoming and outgoing confirmations) is recorded in thetransaction.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 116: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 54

SAP AG 1999

Business Partner:Standing Instructions - Correspondence

Correspondence

Print Fax SWIFT ... Alt. addr. CConf.

BP ABP A

Correspondence type: external

Assign

TreasuryTreasuryMoney marketMoney market

Fixed-term dep.

51 A Fixed-term dep.100 Investment200 Borrowing

Deposit at notice

52 A Deposit at notice100 Investment200 Borrowing

n Additional standing instructions determine the handling of correspondence with a certain businesspartner. You can set up external correspondence types for a particular business partner usingstanding instructions for correspondence. You set up internal correspondence types for all businesspartners.

n Correspondence is normally sent to the regular address of the business partner. If youcorrespondence to be sent to a different address, you must enter it in the ‘Alternative address’ field.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 117: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 55

SAP AG 1999

Standing Standing instructionsinstructions

Current Paymentdetails ID

Payer/payee

Partnerbank ID

Pmntmeth.

Paymentactivity

Housebank

AcctID

UNI 01 2 UX Bank1 GIRUN

USD 01 Bank1 GIRUS

COUNTER-PARTY

...... Paymentrequest

Individualpayment

Samedirection

Pmntmths

Groupdeterm.

Determinegrouping (text)

...... X X X EUS

X...... EUS

......

......

......

Business Partner - Payment Details (1)

n The system uses the standing instructions to default to the payment details to be used. These includeproposals for the house banks you want to use, to save you from having to enter them manually inthe trading or back-office areas. They also include the triggering of automatic payment activities toease your workload. The system either uses the business partner bank details you defined for thebusiness partner, or you enter them manually in the transaction. In the same way, you can also enterthe payment details for payers/payees if they are not the business partner. Using standinginstructions, you can make other settings for the payment and posting logic (for customer accounts orG/L accounts).

n You can define a number of possible payment details for each business partner and for eachcurrency. The system identifies valid payment details using a Payment details ID that you are free toassign together with a currency.

n In the House bank and Account ID fields, you enter your own house bank data.

n If the payment involves a payment activity or payment request, you enter the Payer/payee so that thesystem can use the payment program to generate the corresponding payments. Otherwise thepostings are made to the G/L accounts defined in the account determination. If you explicitly want tochoose a bank account for the counterparty, you must specify a Partner bank ID here. You definethis partner bank ID in the business partner master record.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 118: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 56

SAP AG 1999

Business Partner - Payment Details (2)

Paymentdetails ID

Outgoing IncomingTreasuryTreasury

Money marketMoney market

Fixed-term dep.

51 A Fixed-term dep.100 Investment200 Borrowing

Deposit at notice

01 01x x

Assign

Currency Paymentdetails ID

Housebank

AccountID

UNI 01 DB GIRUN

USD 01 DB GIRUS

......

......

......

Business partnerBusiness partner:: Standing Standing instructionsinstructions - - Payment detailsPayment details

......

......

......

BPBP A A

......

......

......

n Assignments are a means of controlling which payment details are valid for the respectivetransaction types. The assignment can differentiate between incoming or outgoing payments either atproduct category level, product type level, or transaction type level. Example: When you create afixed-term deposit in UNI, the system uses the payment details 01.

n The system uses the house bank and the account ID defined in the payment details for the businesspartner to determine the bank account to which the posting is being made.

n It is vital that you assign payment details once you have created them.

n This means that you can manage different products and/or different directions in separate accounts.

n The system supports multi-level payment methods. By entering a bank chain, you can processpayments via several banks. You can use up to 3 intermediary banks.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 119: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 57

SAP AG 1999

Transaction Settlement / Control

Account assignment reference

DB000001 Deutsche BankFixed-term deposit

G/L account: 113113

Zahlungs-verbindungs-ID

Regu-lierer

Partner-bank-ID

Zahl-weg

Zahlungs-vorgang

Haus-bank

Konto-ID

01 DB GIRO

01 DB USD

Company code 1000 Product type 51A Fixed-term depositTransaction type 100 Investment

D Curr. Effective FType HBank Acct ID Pmnt Pmnt req. - UNI Deuba GIRUN + UNI Deuba GIRUN

Transaction: Payment details

n Depending on the structure of your company, you can transfer financial transactions you haveentered in the Trading area to the Back office area. The back office area includes functions forcontrolling and changing transactions. The key aspects of postprocessing are as follows:

l Generating correspondence in the form of dealing slips, confirmation letters, or confirmationfiles.

l Adding transaction data to include other data that is relevant for processing.

l Preparing postings and payments, for example, controlling the accounts that are used later inthe automated processes. This is your last opportunity to assign an account assignmentreference and payment details to your transaction. You need this information to be able to postthe Treasury flows to Financial Accounting (see account assignment reference).

n When you save a settlement activity, the system changes the activity category of the transaction inorder to record how it is monitored and processed in the back office area.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 120: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 58

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Confirmation Management and ControlFunctions in the Back Office Area

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 121: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 59

SAP AG 1999

Transaction and Position Management:Example of a Fixed-Term Deposit

Create new offer/contract Rollovers Reversals Transaction history

Settlement/control Netting Confirmation letters Reversals Transaction history

User authorizationLimit management

PostingsPaymenttransactionsAccruals/deferralsValuationsReversals

Release

TradingTrading Back officeBack office AccountingAccounting

n After you have entered your transactions at the Trading stage, and checked and completed them inthe Back office, they are processed for accounting purposes. Accounting functions include thetransfer of data to financial accounting (such as posting programs, or position management posting),where the Treasury component makes use of functions in SAP Financial Accounting. Financialtransactions and positions in the closing activities must also be correctly handled. The accountingarea includes functions such as the accrual/deferral of expenses and revenues for a particularaccounting period, and valuation activities.

n You can only post transactions that have reached either contract or settlement status (depending onthe processing category) at internal level (system level).

n If you do not want to post the flows for a particular transaction for the time being, you can blockthese flows for posting.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 122: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 60

SAP AG 1999

Accounting

Fixed-term deposit 1 month 4.5

Financial AccountingFinancial Accounting

FI interfaceSelection of transactionsand flows relevant forposting

Sept 01 1100 - Fixed-term deposit 1,000,000

Oct 01 1120 + Final repayment 1,000,000

Oct 01 1200 + Nominal interest 3,750

n The Treasury information that is relevant for posting is transferred to Financial Accounting via aninterface. The posting logic is based on the flow types generated and the account assignmentreference that belongs to the transaction as well as the user-specific account determination.

n As a rule, you can post the individual flows via G/L accounts or to customer accounts. If you want toactively trigger the payment activities, you can use the FI payment program on the basis of thepostings to the customer accounts. You also have the option of using an extended payment programfor payment requests via which active payments can be made on the basis of postings via non-customer accounts. In this case, payment requests are first generated in Treasury and are paid latereither individually or jointly via the TR payment program. You have the following four postingoptions:1. G/L accounts without payment requests: Flows are posted to bank clearing accounts and clearedvia manual or automatic bank statements.2. Customer accounts without payment requests: Flows are posted to customer accounts andcleared by active payment triggering via the FI payment program. The bank clearing accounts towhich postings have been made are cleared by the bank statement.3. G/L accounts with payment requests4. Customer accounts with payment requests: A payment request is generated for each flow andposting is triggered by the payment requests clearing account or customer account. The subsequentpayment run makes postings to the bank clearing accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 123: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 61

SAP AG 1999

Payment Transaction Handling

House bankDEUBA

IDES

Å Fixed-term depositinvestment

Ç Bank statement

... using clearing accounts

Fixed-term dep. account(Deuba)

House bank account(Deuba)

Å 100 m Ç100 m

Fixed-termdepositinvestment

Bank clearing account

Ç 100 m Å100 m

n Physical payments are not generally made for financial transactions concluded with business partnerswho are also the company's house bank.

n Instead, the corresponding flows are posted to the bank account by the business partner. The flowsfrom Treasury Management that are 'preposted' via the bank clearing accounts are then cleared againby the electronic bank statement.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 124: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 62

SAP AG 1999

Postings: Account Assignment Reference

Fixed-term deposit Date Sept 01

1,000,000.00 Term 1 monthNominal interest 3.5%Deutsche Bank

UNI

Acct ass.ref. Short textDB000002 Deutsche Bank deposit at noticeDB000001 Deutsche Bank fixed-term deposit...

DetailsDetails

Business areaCost center

General ledger

.

.

113113

Company code 1000

n The Account assignment reference controls the G/L account (balance sheet account) to which thecurrent transaction should be posted. You can structure the balance sheet differently using differentaccount assignment references.

n Besides entering the account for managing your positions in the account assignment reference, youcan also assign a cost center (only relevant for posting category 4) and a business area to the accountassignment reference.

n The account assignment reference function is part of the account determination function, which youcan set up according to the currency and/or the account assignment reference. This flexibility enablesyou to structure postings in different ways. For example, in the account determination for revenueand expense postings in the Securities area, you can see (according to the account assignmentreference) whether affiliated or non-affiliated companies issued the respective securities.

n In the Money Market, Foreign Exchange, Derivatives, and Loans areas, you enter the accountassignment directly in the relevant transaction. In the Securities area, you enter the accountassignment reference in the respective position indicator.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 125: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 63

SAP AG 1999

Customizing: Account Determination

Money Market

Functions

Define Settings Check

Accounting

Account Determination

Application 0105 Treasury: Money market

Flow type Payment transactn1100 +Direction - Comp

DebitCreditDocument type

40 1 Balance50 3 Bank clearing

.SA Posting cat. 13

Posting specifications

Application 0105 Treasury: Money marketChart of accts INT Sample chart of accounts

Acct symbol Acct assignment ref. Currency G/L account34.1.14.1.34.2.24.2.34.2.4

++++++

++++++

++++++++++5273100220000479100465000465001

Account assignment

Accounts Symbols

Chart of accounts

Acct symbol Description

...

3 Bank clearing

4.1.1 Interest received

...

Account symbols

n You define the account determination for the relevant application in Customizing.

The account determination function specifies which accounts are used for posting activities. Itincludes the posting specifications, the account symbols used for these, and the accounts assigned tothe symbols.

n The following requirements must be met before you can post a transaction to Financial Accounting:

- You must have created all the accounts you need and set them up correctly.- The document types must appear in the document types table and allow the required account types to be posted.- The number range linked to the document type must have internal number assignment in Financial Accounting- The posting period must be open for posting.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 126: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 64

SAP AG 1999

Fixed-term deposit 1 month 4.5% Acct assignment ref. DB000001

Sept 01 1100 - Fixed-term deposit 1,000,000Oct 01 1120 + Final repayment 1,000,000Oct 01 1200 + Nominal interest 3,750

Fix.-term dep.acct 113113

Deposit

Finalrepayment

D1,000,000

C

1,000,000

Balance sheet account acc. to acct assignment reference

Interest earned 273100

Nominalinterest

D C 3,750

Bank clearing acct 113105

FT depositNominal int.Finalrepayment

D C 1,000,000

3,750

1,000,000

Deb.bal.sheet Credit bank

Debit bank Credit bal.sheet

Debit bank Credit int. earned

Flow type

Posting specifications

1100 -

1120 +

1200 +

Posting a Transaction: Summary

n When you process financial transactions (money market, forex, derivatives, securities, loans), theybecome business transactions that have to be entered in the accounting system. These automaticpostings and the related offsetting entries on FI accounts may be carried out online.

n The posting specifications you enter determine how individual business transactions are posted. Inthe posting specifications you define the rules for posting and for account determination for eachflow type when you configure the system.

n The flow type determines the correct posting specifications for each flow to be posted.

n The document type and the posting keys for the debit and credit side of the posting included in theposting specifications represent control information that is passed on directly to the financialaccounting module. In addition, the posting category and the account symbols in the postingspecifications contain the relevant information for determining the concrete G/L and subledgeraccounts via the Treasury posting interface.

n From the display screen for an accounting document (for example, FI document), you can see wherethe posting originated in Treasury. To do this, choose Original document from the Environmentmenu (Display document, transaction FB03) on the display screen for the FI document in the generalledger. The system displays an overview of the flows in Treasury, which resulted in postings to FI.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 127: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 65

SAP AG 1999

Treasury Management and Cash Management

Fixed-term depositFixed-term deposit Via activity atfixed-term deposit level

Via activity atfixed-term deposit level

Change toclearing accounts

Change toclearing accounts

Change to bank account level

Change to bank account level

Clearing entry viaaccount statementClearing entry viaaccount statement

Post flows toclearing account

Post flows toclearing account

n The example above represents an ideal workflow describing how Treasury Management and CashManagement interact with each other and also showing how postings are made to FinancialAccounting.

n As a rule, payments are triggered by the business partner (bank) and processed further by electronicbank statements in Cash Management.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 128: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 66

SAP AG 1999

Transfer to Financial Accounting -Logical Process

Assign planning levels

IDES AG1000

Fixed-term deposit51A

Time deposits - banksTB

Contract10

10/02 10/03 10/03 later10/05

Cash Management: Display Levels

LeBanksBanks

Description 10/02 10/03 10/04 later10/05

TB Time deposits 150,000 xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxxxxx,xxx. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

B5B5 ClearingClearing 150,000. . .. . . . . . . . .

F0F0 BanksBanks

Balance

. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

150,000 xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

n Each activity (status) within a business transaction (contract, settlement, etc.) is displayed in CashManagement automatically (with the exception of orders). You can view and analyze the activityusing a separate level, if required.

n When you enter a transaction, the cash flows generated by the transactions (irrespective of whetherthey have already been posted) can be seen immediately in Cash Management and can be used forplanning purposes.

n In Customizing, you have to maintain the planning levels at which you want to display yourinformation for G/L accounts and/or subledger accounts. You do this for each of the relevant producttypes and activity categories (statuses).

n Example: Concluded time deposits transaction: TB level - time deposits

(Pre)posted time deposits transaction: B5 level - bank clearing account

After receipt of bank statement: F0 level - bank account

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 129: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 67

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Posting Due Flows to FI and Evaluating themin Cash Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 130: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 68

SAP AG 1999

Payment Transaction Handling

Å 1st fixed-term deposit

Ç 2nd fixed-term deposit

...using a clearing account for payment requests

Fixed-term depositaccount (broker)

House bankaccount (Deuba)

Å 100 m Ñ150 mPaymentorder

Payment requestclearing account Bank clearing account

É 150 m É150 m

Ç 50 m

Å100 mÇ50 mÑ 150 m

É Payment (trigger paymentrequest run)

Ñ Bank statement

Payment

Fixed-term deposit

IDES

House bankDEUBA

BrokerBroker

n If you conclude transactions with a business partner with whom you do not have a house bankaccount, you can generate payment requests. This option applies in cases where the payment detailsof the business partner are known, but you do not want each transaction to result in a physicalpayment. This function also enables you to make joint payments for groups of transactions.

n Examples of when to use the payment program:

- You conclude several transactions with a business partner that is not a house bank;

- When you post to the fixed-term deposit account, you generate payment requests at the sametime

- All transactions are managed on the payment request clearing account

- Payments can be grouped together/netted

- When payment is due, a payment run is triggered in accounting and the payment amount istransferred to the bank clearing account

- At the same time, a payment medium is generated that is passed on to the house bank

- When the bank statement is received, the payment amount is posted to the bank account thefollowing day

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 131: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 69

SAP AG 1999

Posting using the Payment Program

Currentparameters

Advicenote

Bank transfer

Eurocheck

Check

Proposal data setProposal data set

Print data setPrint data set

Paymentsummary

IDOC

Proposal runProposal runProposal run

Payment runPayment run

Editproposal

Paymentcontrol

Documents

PaymentrequestMasterMaster

Print programPrint programPrint program

n Together with the account determination function in the Treasury posting interface, you can controlwhether payment activities involve a flow of funds.

n The payment program can do the following:

- Automatically select the requests to be paid- Create payment lists and logs- Create payment documents (customer / vendor / G/L accounts)- Create payment medium (forms / advice notes / disks).

As a rule, you first activate the payment proposal run. This creates a proposal data set, which you cancheck and process before you perform the actual run.

n There are two different payment programs depending on the task you are performing:

- The standard payment program from FI which settles open items from the accountsreceivable/payable area.

- The enhanced payment program which also allows you to make postings via G/L accounts, as wellas via customer/vendor accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 132: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 70

SAP AG 1999

Pro rata temporis

Pro rata temporis withlinear discounting

Pro rata temporis

Pro rata temporis withlinear discounting

Difference procedure

Reset procedure

Difference procedure

Reset procedure

Accrual/deferral Accrual/deferral proceduresprocedures

Accrual/deferral Accrual/deferral methodsmethods

Accrual/Deferral Procedures and Methods

n To reflect the earnings of a given period correctly in the balance sheet, they have to be assigned tothe correct accounting period, irrespective of when they are due for payment. You use theaccrual/deferral function to calculate the expenses (outgoings) and revenues (incomings) for a periodon a certain key date/period-end closing (for example, at the end of a fiscal year).

n The accrual/deferral method describes how the amount to be accrued/deferred is calculated.The accrual/deferral procedure, on the other hand, describes how the amount to beaccrued/deferred is updated to the expenses and revenues accounts.

You use the difference procedure to transfer any expenses and revenues that have arisen sincethe last accrual/deferral run and the present accrual/deferral run from the accruals/deferralsaccounts to the related income statement accounts.

The reset or accumulation procedure adjusts the income statement accounts on theaccrual/deferral key date by the amount of accrual or deferral calculated, and subsequentlyresets the adjustment.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 133: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 71

SAP AG 1999

Interest Accruals/Deferrals: Customizing

l When you define a flow type, you indicate whether aflow is relevant for accrual/deferral

l You enter the accrual/deferral procedure (reset ordifference) and the resulting flow types for each flowwhen you define accruals/deferralsn Difference procedure: Accrued/deferred interest remains the same

n Reset procedure: Interest is accrued/deferred and theaccrual/deferral is reset on the key date +1

l You must define special accrual/deferral flow types(accrual/deferral and reset)

n The accrual/deferral is based on the flows of the business transactions selected. The main variablesfor calculating the amount are the accrual/deferral period and the flow types that are indicated asbeing relevant for accrual/deferral.

n Accrual: "A future income/expense, which is assigned to the accrual/deferral period on a pro ratabasis". These types of income/expense may not legally appear as accruals/deferrals on the balancesheet (for example, receivables to income).

n Deferral: "An already due income/expense, which is assigned to the accrual/deferral period on a prorata basis". The amount is transferred from the expense/income account to the prepaidexpenses/income account" (prepaid expenses to expense account and income account to prepaidincome).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 134: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 72

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Interest Amount Accruals/Deferrals atYear End

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 135: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 73

SAP AG 1999

Transaction History

History: Activity sequenceHistory: Activity sequence

Activity Act. category Date Activestatus

SettlementSettlement

Administrative Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AGTrans.ActivityAct.cat.Order

47111Basic Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AG TransactionActivityAct.cat. Order

47111

Administrative Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AG Trans.ActivityAct.cat.Contr.

47111Basic Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AG Trans.ActivityAct.cat. Contr.

47111

Verwaltungsdaten

BukrPartGart

000151a100

SAP AG GeschäftVorgangVorg.Typ Prol.

47111Grunddaten

BukrPartGart

000151a100

SAP AG GeschäftVorgangVorg.Typ Prol.

47111

Verwaltungsdaten

BukrPartGart

000151a100

SAP AGGeschäftVorgangVorg.Typ Abrech.

47111Grunddaten

BukrPartGart

000151a100

SAP AGGeschäftVorgangVorg.Typ Abrech.

47111

10/01/YY10/02/YY

10/31/YY

12

43

OrderContract

RolloverSettlement 10/02/YY

ReplacedReplaced

Replaced5

Replaced

30.11.JJ5 Settlement Active

. . .. . . . . . . . .

OrderOrder ContractContract RolloverRolloverSettlementSettlement

Administrative Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AGTrans.ActivityAct.cat. Sttlmnt

47111Basic Data

CoCdPTypTTyp

000151a100

SAP AGTrans.ActivityAct.cat. Sttlmnt

47111

11/30/YY

n Use the history function to display the activity sequence for a particular transaction. You see a list ofactivities, which are either active, reversed, or have been replaced by a follow-up activity.

n The transaction history enables you to trace each activity (status) and the corresponding details.

n The system also stores the main changes to transactions in change documents. This records whichuser changed/corrected the structure characteristics of a transaction at a particular time.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 136: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 74

SAP AG 1999

Managing Currency Risks in Cash Managementusing Foreign Exchange Transactions

This unit focuses on analyzing the currency side of forextransactions, and displays the currency situation both in UNIand USD. The UNI and USD sides should be viewed bothseparately and jointly in Cash Management.Unlike the Market Risk Management evaluations describedlater, these analyses only include fixed cash flows. It is clearthat the existing cash flows represent a risk if the USDexchange rate changes. Forward rate transactions areconcluded to illustrate how these currency risks can beinfluenced. In this case too, the UNI and USD sides must beanalyzed both separately and jointly.

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Foreign Exchange Scenario (1)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 137: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 75

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Foreign Exchange Scenario (2)

Managing Currency Risks in Cash Managementusing Foreign Exchange TransactionsIn the example, the initial situation in Cash Management isoutlined, the foreign exchange transactions are thenconcluded, and the impact on Cash Management isexplained. To be able to draw up the balance sheet, yourcompany needs to calculate the (un)realized gains andlosses from foreign currency transactions. The proceduretypically used for key date valuations and for determiningthe related unrealized gains/losses is described usingforward exchange transactions as an example. Finally, youwill learn how to calculate realized gains and losses after aforward exchange transaction has been concluded.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 138: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 76

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Exchange: Product Types

Product types

DerivativesForexLoansSecuritiesMoney market

n Forex spotdeals

n Forwardexchangedeals

n Forex swaps

Hedging instrumentsInvestment/borrowing

instruments

n The integration of Cash-, Treasury, and Market Risk Management allows you to analyze the effectsof forex trading on the liquidity situation of your company as well as the resulting currency risks.The current market data is supplied by means of realtime datafeed.

n Forex trading incorporates the following product types:

- Spot exchange and forward transactions

- Forex swap transactions

- OTC currency options

n Currency options are handled in derivative financial transactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 139: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 77

SAP AG 1999

Creating an Order: Forward Exchange Transaction

Purchase Sale

Currency Currency

Amount Amount

Rate/Value date

Rate Invers

Spot

Swap

Liquidity

Value date

Contract data

Contract date Trader

Contact person External ref.

1,000,000.00

USD UNI

1.82

++2

09/29/YYYY

Current rate !!

ü Company code 1000 IDES AG

üProduct type 60A Forex EXTERN

üTransaction type 102 Forward transaction

üPartner Deuba ...

...

n You enter the order data on this screen.

n The execute order activity assigns the contract status to the transaction.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 140: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 78

SAP AG 1999

From To RatioITL UNI 1000 : 1

1 = Current rateM = Middle rateG = Bid rate

Currency Cal. IDCurrency Cal. ID UNI UNI 01 01

L curr. F curr.L curr. F curr. ITL ITL UNI UNI

CURRENCYCURRENCY

Rate types

Translation ratios

CalendarCalendar

Leading Leading currenciescurrencies

Enterexchange rates

ExRT Frm To Dir.quot.M ITL UNI 1.20

Currency Master Data

n You use the rate type to define exchange rates for different purposes on the same date in the system.The system uses rate type 'M' for currency translation when you post and clear documents. This ratetype must be entered in the system.

n The translation ratios indicate the units of measure in which you interpret the exchange ratesentered.Example: A rate entry for ITL in UNI with the above translation ratio means:

1000 ITL costs x UNI costs x UNI

n When you enter exchange rates, the system uses the relevant Customizing tables when you chooseEnvironment - Market data - Manual market data entry in the application.To enter an exchange rate, you enter a rate type, a currency pair, and the valid-from date. In theexample above, the middle rate is 1.20 Uni for 1000 Italian Lire.

n Treasury-specific settings affect the calendar and the leading currencies:- Calendar: You assign a calendar to each currency. When you enter a transaction, the system carriesout a working day check for the calendar assigned to the transaction currency.- When you enter an exchange rate in the transaction, for example "1.20", the system determineswhether to read the rate as 1.20 Uni (following currency) for Italian lire or as Italian lire for Uni. Itdoes this according to how you defined the leading currency and following currency.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 141: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 79

SAP AG 1999

Datafeed Architecture

SAP R/3 Datafeed providers

selective refresh

request

requ

est

reply Internet/RFC

TR applications

Informationsproviders

Externalinterfaceprogram Datafeed

LogDatafeedserver

Translationtable

Marketrisk

mgmt.Securities Forex . . .

operativeSAP tables

reply

Marketdata

buffer

n In Treasury, you can import data (such as security prices, exchange rates, interest rates, volatilities)to SAP tables or to the market data buffer using the datafeed function. The data you save in themarket data buffer is overwritten when you call up the datafeed function again.

n A translation table ensures that the SAP internal names are assigned to the notations used by theexternal data provider. A variety of tools support the automatic maintenance of this table.

n You can call up data synchronously or asynchronously. When you call the data synchronously, youare connected to the data provider until the requested data is imported. If you call up the dataasynchronously, the connection to the data provider is interrupted once the market data request hasbeen sent. It is only reactivated when the data provider is ready to supply the requested information.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 142: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 80

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Managing Currency Risks in CashManagement using Forex Transactions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 143: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 81

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Exchange in Cash Management

Assign planning levels

IDES AGIDES AG1000

Foreign exchangeForeign exchange60A

Forex banksForex banksDB

ContractContract20

10/02 10/03 10/03 later10/05

Cash Management: Display Levels

LevBanks Banks

Description 10/02 10/03 10/04 later10/05

TB Time deposits xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxxxxx,xxx. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

OBOB Currency optionsCurrency options xxx,xxx. . .. . . . . . . . .

DBDB ForexForex

Balance

. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

123,456 xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx xxx,xxx

E.g. forwardexchange transactionsE.g. forwardE.g. forwardexchange transactionsexchange transactions

Inflow in foreign currencyInflow in foreign currencyInflow in foreign currency

DBGiroDBGiro - 1.48 m UNI- 1.48 m UNI

Outflow in local currency Outflow in local currency Outflow in local currency

DBUS$DBUS$ +1.00 m USD+1.00 m USD

Display accountsDisplay accountsDisplay accounts

xxx,xxx

xxx,xxx

n Each activity (status) within a business transaction (order, contract, settlement, etc.) is displayed inCash Management automatically. You can view and analyze the activity using a separate level, ifrequired.

n Such a function is particularly useful for cash managers for planning purposes. They can view thecash flows from Treasury transactions whose value date is known, even if the flows have not yetbeen posted.

n In Customizing, you have to enter the planning levels at which you want to display your informationfor the G/L accounts and/or subledger accounts. You do this for each of the relevant product typesand activity categories (statuses). This enables you to display a contract, for example, at differentlevels depending on the particular activity.

n When you display foreign exchange transactions, such as forward rate transactions, you have tomake sure that there is an inflow on one currency side and an outflow on the other. If you firstperform evaluations according to levels (for example, at forward exchange transaction level), youshould only see the difference between the two currency amounts. You only see the incoming oroutgoing cash flows on the individual currency accounts when you branch to the accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 144: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 82

SAP AG 1999

Netting and Payment Requests

Administrative Data

CoCdPTypeTType

000151a100

SAP AG TransactionActivityAct.cat. Contract

47111Basic Data

CoCdPTypeTType

000151a100

SAP AG TransactnActivityAct.cat. Contract

47111

Administrative Data

CoCdPTypeTType

000151a100

SAP AG TransactnActivityAct. cat. Sttlmnt

47111Basic Data

CoCdPTypeTType

000151a100

SAP AG TransactnActivityAct.cat. Sttlmnt

47111

NettingNetting

Create Netting Transaction: Data

Cat.No.Partn

KMP001DB

Netting

Deutsche BankVal.dte 01/01/YY

PostingPosting

Treasury: Posting of Flows

TestmandantWalldorf

Treasury: Buchungen Protokoll

TRTR TRTRNettingNetting AccountsAccounts

FIFI PaymentPaymentrequestsrequests

FIFI

SettlementSettlementContractContract

TransactionsTransactions

n Netting is a special form of joint payment of transactions. As a rule, all transactions can be paidjointly. Netting represents a specific part of these transactions.

n The decision to create a netting transaction is not usually taken until shortly before the due date ofcash flows. This normally takes place the day the transactions involved are posted. Only then do youknow which transactions (e.g. forward exchange and spot exchange transactions) are suitable for netpayment.

n You can group flows together in netted transactions provided they have

- the same company code

- the same business partner

- the same payment date

- the same payment methods

- and other payment program criteria

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 145: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 83

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Active Liquidity Management using Netted MoneyMarket and Forex Transactions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 146: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 84

SAP AG 1999

Valuation: Valuation Units

Macro view Micro view

Selection ofvaluationobjects

Global selection operative

underlyingtransactions

Treasurytransactions

Valuationunit:

Hedgeunit*

Valuation Accountingvaluation:

E.g. Recognition ofloss principle

TR-TR-MRMMRM

TR-TR-TMTM

Valuationunit:

Portfolioposition*

Valuationunit:

Singletransaction

Risk-/market-oriented valuationValue-at-RiskMark-to-market

n The valuation requirements for accounting purposes are covered both in Financial Accounting and inTreasury Management on a single transaction basis.

n * In development: Release not yet specified

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 147: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 85

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Currency Valuation (FCV Determination: 2)

Example: Forward exchange transactionExample: Forward exchange transactionForex transaction: USD/UNI

Contract date: 03/01/YY

Value date: 05/31/YY

USD purchase amount: 1,000,000 USD (forward rate)UNI sale amount: 1,700,000 UNI

Spot rate: 1.65Forward rate: 1.70

Valuations on 03/31/YY and 04/30/YYFinal valuation on 05/31/YY

Local currency = UNI

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 148: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 86

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Currency Valuation

1st valuation: 03/31/YY

2nd valuation: 04/30/YY

Final valuation: 05/31/YY

Forward rate: 1.70 Local currency = UNI

DateDate Fwrd rateFwrd rate UNIUNI Not realizedNot realized RealizedRealized

03/01/YY 1.70 1,700,00003/31/YY 1.65 1,650,000 - 50,00004/30/YY 1.72 1,720,000 + 20,00005/31/YY 1.69 1,690,000 - 10,000

Example: Forward exchange transactionExample: Forward exchange transaction

n This example shows you how to create and reverse provisions, and how to disclose realized losses.

n The valuation on 04/30/YY shows an unrealized gain. According to German law, this does not haveto be disclosed.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 149: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 87

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Currency Valuation (1) - G/L Accounting

Liability provisionsAsset provisions

UNI bank account

Balance sheet

P + L

1st valuation: 03/31/YY

Unrealized loss50T1

Clearing account

USD bank account

Realized loss Realized gain

Unrealized gain

Closing forwardrate: 1.70

Market forwardrate: 1.65

50T 1

Create liability provisions anddisclose unrealized loss

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 150: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 88

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Currency Valuation (2) - G/L Accounting

Liability provisionsAsset provisions

UNI bank account

Balance sheet

P + LUnrealized loss

50T

Clearing account

USD bank account

Realized loss Realized gain

Unrealized gain1

20T

20T

2 50T 150T2

50T 2 2

Closing forwardrate: 1.70

Market forwardrate: 1.72

Reverse liability provisions, createasset provisions, and discloseunrealized gain

2nd valuation: 04/30/YY

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 151: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 89

SAP AG 1999

Foreign Currency Valuation (3) - G/L Accounting

Liability provisionsAsset provisions20T

UNI bank account

Balance sheet

P + L

Final valuation: 05/31/YY (after posting transaction)

Unrealized loss50T

Clearing account

USD bank account

Realized loss Realized gain

Unrealized gain

3

1

50T20T

20T

2

2

2

1.70M UNI

1M USD

1.70M UNI 1M USD10T 3

10T3

50T 1

50T 2 20T3

Closing forwardrate: 1.70

Market spotrate: 1.69

n The final valuation of the forward exchange transaction is carried out with the help of a currencyclearing account. To do this, you update the transaction using the forward rate fixed in thetransaction. You also translate the foreign currency amount at the market rate.

n The difference amount (realized gain / loss) is calculated by the final valuation. It is entered as avaluation flow in Treasury and transferred in the posting run to the Financial Accounting department.

n You have to post your transactions before the realized gains and losses can be calculated.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 152: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 90

SAP AG 1999

Limit ManagementAs part of the end-of-day processing, you also want to checkthe limit utilization for money market and foreign exchangetransactions. You particularly want to evaluate the businesspartner/counterparty limits and the trader limits.

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Limit Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 153: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 91

SAP AG 1999

Limit Management (1)

l Limits are updated on the basis of the followingcharacteristics:n Company code

n Trader

n Business partner

n Currency

n Portfolio

n Limit product group

n Country key

n Industry key

n Rating indicator

Limit utilizationBusiness partner: Dt.Limit amount: 100 mUtilization: 30 mAbove/below: 70 m

As offline report

n Limit management enables you to monitor transactions according to their different amounts byrecording limit utilizations. Limits are determined according to volume, based on the position of thetransactions on the key date. You specify limits/volumes on the basis of limit characteristics, whichyou can combine in any number of ways.

n If you do not want all transactions to be included in a limit type, you can specify which product typesor transaction types you want to include using the 'limit product group' characteristic. You are free todefine your own limit product types and assign them to the product type/transaction type level formoney market and foreign exchange transactions, currency options, loans, and bonds in theSecurities area. This enables you to examine limits (risks) in greater detail.

n You can therefore conclude fixed-term deposits up to a predetermined total volume with a specificbusiness partner. You do this by assigning the product type/transaction type "fixed-term deposit"(lending or borrowing) to a limit product group and combining this group with business partnercharacteristics.

n You also have to specify whether you want the limit utilizations for assets or liabilities transactionsto be calculated separately, together, or whether you want to offset them against each other afterclearing. You can call up an overview showing the current utilization amount of a limit and theamount still available.

n You can assign limits according to time and use the SAP List Viewer when you display the limitsand the limit utilizations. You can also branch from the limits to the limit utilizations.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 154: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 92

SAP AG 1999

Limit Management (2)

Limit type:

Dres. bank

L1 : Limit characteristic: Business partner:90 m

Dt. bank 100 m

Total FTD (Fixed-term deposit)Total FX (Foreign exchange)Total DE (Derivatives)

70 m50 m70 m

Limit type:

MM values Limits

FGDEVDV

40 m30 m50 m

Limit type: L3 L3 : Limit characteristics: Partner / Limit product group

Dres. bank

FGDEVDV

50 m40 m60 m

Dt. bank

L1

Dres. 90

Dt.100

L3

FTD 40

FTD50

L2 70

L1

L2 : Limit characteristic: Limit product group

n By combining any number of limit characteristics for which limits are defined, you can represent awhole range of limits.

n Characteristic values are defined for each limit type for the characteristics assigned, and a limitamount is assigned to each of the values/value combinations.

n Above examples:

L1: Limit type 1 - Business partner limitYou may conclude transactions (money market, spot exchange, forward exchange transactions and options) of up to 100 m UNI with the business partner Deutsche Bank

L2: Limit type 2 - Product-/Transaction type limitYou may conclude fixed-term deposits (total, across all partners) at 70 m UNI.

L3: Limit type 3 - Partner/Transaction limitYou may conclude fixed-term deposits at 50 UNI with the business partner Deutsche Bank.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 155: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 93

SAP AG 1999

Limit Management (3)

- Edit limits for limit types:Limit type L3: BP LPG Amount

Dres. Bank FTD 40 m Dt. Bank FTD 50 mDres. Bank FX 30 m

. . .- Generate utilizations- Overview of utilizations

Customizing:

Define limit type: L3 Limit characteristics

- Characteristic 1: Business partner (BP)- Characteristic 2: Limit product group (LPG)

Before: 1. Define LPG 2. In product type/transaction type: assign LPG

Application:

assign

n Customizing:When you define the limit type, you have to specify the limits and limit utilizations to which the(combination) of limit characteristics relate.You also have to specify whether you want the limit utilizations for assets or liabilities transactionsto be calculated separately, together, or whether you want to offset them against each other afterclearing.

If you use the "limit product group" characteristic, you can restrict the number of transactions youinclude in a limit.

n Application:You define the values for the combinations of characteristics for each limit type and assign the limitsaccordingly.

The report program "Generate Limit Utilizations" calculates the utilizations for all limit types on thekey date. You can schedule this program as a job. The selection methods Risk of default and Foreigncurrency risk differ in the way they include the transactions from the Foreign Exchange area.

n The report program "Overview of Limit Utilizations" displays a comparison of limits with the amountof the current limit utilization and the amounts still available. Any limits that have been exceeded arein color.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 156: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 94

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Unit Summary (1)

l Overview of Cash Management

l Active liquidity management using money markettransactions

l Transaction management processes in TreasuryManagementn Trading and back-office functions and transfer to

Financial Accounting

n Interest accruals/deferrals using fixed-term deposits

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 157: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 95

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm: Unit Summary (2)

l Risk management using foreign exchangetransactionsn Trading, back office, and transfer to Financial

Accounting

n Foreign currency valuation using forward exchangetransactions as an example

l Managing limit utilization

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 158: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 96

Data for the "Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm" Unit

Explanation of the symbols in the exercises and solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Course objectives

Business scenario

Tips & tricks

Warning and caution

Data used in the exercisesData Data in the training system Data in the IDES system

Company codes TR00 to TR20 1000

General ledger accounts 113100, 113105, 113113113913, 118888

113100, 113105, 113113118888

Treasury businesspartners

DEUBA – Deutsche BankCITI – Citibank broker

1000 – Deutsche Bank1002 – Citibank

(CM) groupings BANKEN (Bank accounthistory Germany), BANK-IST

BANKEN (Bank accounthistory Germany), BANK-IST

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 159: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 97

(Status of available bankaccounts), PERSONEN(Customers, vendors andclearing accounts), GESAMT(Total display)

(Status of available bankaccounts), PERSONEN(Customers, vendors andclearing accounts), GESAMT(Total display)

Notes on the exercises:

Create transactions in the following currencies: UNI, CHF or USD. Exchange ratesare only maintained for these currencies.

Do not delete or change any of the existing Customizing entries. You are onlyallowed to add new data.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 160: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 98

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium TermExercises

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Cash Management functions

Liquidity analysis in your company is the basis for your investment orborrowing decisions. By analyzing the short-term liquidity and includingthe expected cash flows from logistics, you can identify the liquiditysurpluses.

1-1 Analyze the total liquidity position of your company using the cash position and theliquidity forecast functions.To do this, use the ‘Total display’ grouping and only look at the cash flows in yourcompany code TRXX.Save this setting as a variant.

1-2 What is the difference between levels and groups/accounts?To find this out, look at the cash position with the BANKEN grouping or theliquidity forecast with the PERSONEN grouping.

1-3 What does it mean to access a transaction via levels and then to switch to groups, orto start with groups/accounts and then switch to levels?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 161: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 99

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Creating a new business partner

To take full advantage of the excellent conditions offered by a new bank,use the bank as your new business partner for all Treasury transactions.

2-1 Create a business partner PartnerXX in the role of Treasury partner.

2-2 Authorize this partner for the following Treasury transactions:- Money market- Foreign exchange- Securities- Derivatives

2-3 Enter the following in the Company code data:– Reconciliation account 140 000– Planning group E2, domestic customers.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 162: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 100

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Active liquidity management using money market transactions.Integration of trading functions into Cash Management

The new business partner offers you good conditions for a fixed-termdeposit, which you want to enter in your trading department.

3-1 Fixed-term deposit

Create a fixed-term deposit.As you do this, check the cash flow and add other flows to your transaction (e.g.charges)

(Note: Do not enter an account assignment reference or payment details!

Make a note of your transaction number, You will need it later on for settlementand posting activities: _________

3-2 Display the cash inflows and outflows in Cash Management.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 163: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 101

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Active liquidity management using money market transactions.Confirmation management and control functions in the back-officearea.

After the trader has entered the fixed-term deposit, it is processed in theback office. You agree to send your partner a letter of confirmation aboutthe financial transaction and your partner agrees to sendcounterconfirmation back to you. After this has been checked, the bankchains and the balance sheet accounts are checked and the transaction isthen settled.

4-1 In the case of fixed-term deposits, you want the transactions to be confirmed andcounterconfirmed. Use the standing instructions function to set up thecorrespondence media for your business partner (“PartnerXX”).

4-2 4-2-1 First check the account assignment reference again in the oldtransaction and check the payment details.

4-2-2 Now assign payment details to your business partner (PartnerXX) usingthe standing instructions.

4-2-3 Check the general ledger account again and the payment details in theold transaction. Has anything changed?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 164: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 102

4-3 Create a new fixed-term deposit with your business partner. Check the paymentdetails in the new transaction.(Note: For the second fixed-term deposit, select a start of term date that is laterthan that of the first transaction. This makes the impact on Cash Managementmuch more noticeable.)

Transaction number (new transaction): ___________

4-4 4-4-1 Generate a letter of confirmation for the fixed-term deposit you havejust created. Now check the correspondence status in the transaction.

4-4-2 Assume the counterconfirmation has been received. Enter this in thesystem and check the correspondence status again.

4-5 Use the collective processing function to settle the fixed-term deposit, and checkthe account assignment reference and the payment details. Then refresh thecollective processing display.

4-6 Take a look in Cash Management. Have there been any changes compared with theprevious exercise?If so, why?If now, why not?

4-7 When you define payment details for the business partner, how does this affect theway the (new) fixed-term deposit is displayed in Cash Management? Explain thedifference.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 165: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 103

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Active liquidity management using money market transactions.Posting flows that are due to Financial Accounting and evaluatingthem in Cash Management

At the start of term, the posting run for all the flows that are due istriggered in Financial Accounting. This offsets the principal increaseagainst the bank clearing account, which is later cleared when the bankstatement is imported.

5-1 Fixed-term deposit

5-1-1 Look at the cash flow in your second fixed-term deposit.

5-1-2 Post the first flows (in other words, the principal increase) of yoursecond fixed-term deposit.In the posting log, click the flow to display the generated FIposting.

5-1-3 Notice the change to the posting status in the cash flow.

5-2 Take a look in Cash Management. Are there any changes?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 166: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 104

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Active liquidity management using money market transactions.Accrual/deferral of interest amounts at end of year

To carry out year-end tasks, you have to assign interest rate flows to thecorrect accounting period. You use the reset procedure to perform thisaccrual/deferral in your company.

6-1 Create another fixed-term deposit with a longer term that goes beyond the end ofthe year.

6-2 Post the deposit amount.Note: Before you post the transaction, you have to settle (or control) it in the backoffice.

6-3 Perform an interest accrual/deferral run for your fixed-term deposit for a datebetween the start and the end of the term. In this case on 12/31/YY.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 167: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 105

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Managing currency risks in Cash Management using foreignexchange transactions

In your liquidity evaluations you discover a deficit of USD in threemonths. You transform the resulting foreign currency risk by a suitableforward exchange transaction; in other words, you purchase USD and sellUNI.

7-1 Make sure that the payment details for foreign exchange transactions aremaintained for UNI and USD in the standing instructions for your business partner.

7-2 Create a forward exchange transaction with your business partner to purchase100,000 USD in exchange for UNI with a value date in three months. Create andexecute an order. Then settle and post it.

Display the impact of the transaction in the various Cash Management views.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 168: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 106

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

• Active liquidity management using netted money market and forextransactions

In order to meet your payment commitments in UNI, you set today’sfixed-term deposit and the forward exchange transaction. You shouldonly pay the difference between the fixed-term deposit and the forwardexchange transaction to the Citibank broker as a netted payment.

8-1 Create a fixed-term deposit and a forward rate transaction with the same value datewith the Citibank broker (CITI).Make sure that the payment details for the UNI side of the transaction (particularlythe house bank and house bank account) are the same.

Also make sure that you set the payment requests indicator when you enter thepayment details and you enter the payer/payee and the partner bank.

Then settle the transactions.

8-2 Group both transactions together using the netting function. First display theproposal list, then assign the transactions and display the netting.

8-3 Then carry out the posting run and discuss the outcome.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 169: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 107

Liquidity Management in the Short and Medium Term: Solutions

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

1-1 To create a variant, choose:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Cash Management⇒ Information System⇒ Reports for Cash Management⇒ Liquidity Analyses⇒ Liquidity Forecast

Enter the following data:

Field name or data type ValuesCompany code TRXX

(XX is the group number)

Cash position Set indicator here

Liquidity forecast Set indicator here

Grouping GESAMT

Delta display with balances Select(Button: All selections)

⇒ Goto⇒ Variants⇒ Save as variantor ⇒ Click Save

Execute the variant

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 170: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 108

1-2 To differentiate between levels and groups:

a) Cash position (⇒ “accounts”):

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Cash Management⇒ Information System⇒ Reports for Cash Management⇒ Liquidity Analyses⇒ Cash Position

Enter the following data:

Field name or data type ValuesCompany code TRXX

Cash position Set indicator here

Grouping BANKEN

Delta display with balances Select(Button: All selections)

You see: Summarization: DeutscheAccounts: DBGIRO

Levels: AB

(Prerequisite: A payment advice note has already been created)b) Liquidity forecast (⇒ “Groups”)

⇒ Accounting

⇒ ... ⇒ Liquidity Forecast

Enter the following data:

Field name or data type ValuesCompany code TRXX

Liquidity forecast Set indicator here

Grouping PERSONEN

Delta display with balances Select(Button: All selections)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 171: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 109

You see: Summarization: RevenuesGroups: E2 (domestic customers)

Levels: F1 cust./vendor

(Prerequisite: A customer invoice has already been created)

c) The (planning) accounts and groups show how payments are assigned.These are the names given to the bank accounts or customer/vendor groups,which are affected by this cash activity. The accounts and groups containquantitative information.

(Example: Account “DBGIRO” groups together the inflows and outflows ofthe corresponding current account)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 172: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 110

The (planning) levels tell you where the cash flows recorded in the accounts orgroups have come from. They contain qualitative information.

(Example: The flows related to DBGIRO actually come from the (levels) “timedeposits”, “Payment advice notes confirmed” ...)

d) Additional information:

View liquidity forecast w i t h bank accounts:⇒ Accounting⇒ ... ⇒ Liquidity Forecast(Here, you set the “Cash position” and “Liquidity forecast”indicator!Grouping: Total display[This includes both the groupings “bank account history” and“customers/vendors and clearing accounts”])

You see: Summarization: 1. Bank account history

Groups: DBGIROLevels: AB

and2. Personen (Customers/vendors and clearingaccounts)

Groups: E2Levels: F1 cust./vendor

1-3 Solution:

Case 1: Levels; Groups/accountsCase 2: Groups/accounts; levels

Both cases produce the same total balances.

Case 1 primarily allows you to draw overall conclusions about the underlyingtransactions. From there, you can branch down from the individual transactions intothe relevant groups/accounts.

Case 2, on the other hand, first gives you an overview of the accounts/groups. Itthen tells you which transactions relate to these accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 173: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 111

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

2-1 To create a business partner:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Basic Functions⇒ Master Data⇒ Business Partner⇒ Create

Enter the following data:

Field name or data type Values

Business partner PartnerXX

Grouping TR02

Role category 1000 (Treasury partner)

Classification E.g. Choose an organization

Enter the relevant data ...

⇒ Save

Additional information:⇒ ... ⇒ Business partner⇒ Change

Enter: PartnerXX (do not enter a role category).You see: Role overview. After selecting the role (double-click), you can enter theGeneral data and the Company code data for the business partner by choosingGoto.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 174: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 112

2-2 To enter authorizations for the business partner:

⇒ Accounting⇒ ... ⇒ Business Partner⇒ Standing Instructions⇒ Transaction Authorizations

The standing instructions for the business partners for paymentdetails, correspondence, authorizations and derived flows havebeen included in the maintenance functions for the business partnerand can also be edited there.

2-3 To maintain the planning group/reconciliation account:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Basic Functions⇒ Master Data⇒ Business Partner⇒ Change

Field name or data type Values

Business partner PartnerXX

Role category 1000 (Treasury partner)

In the role overview: Role category 1000: Double-click;⇒ Goto⇒ Company code data⇒ Account managementor

In the role overview: Role category 1000: Double-click; Company code data button

Field name or data type Values

Reconciliation account 140000 (Trade receivables -domestic)

Planning group E2: (domestic customers)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 175: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 113

⇒ Save

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 176: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 114

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

3-1 To create a fixed-term deposit for your business partner:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Trading⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Create

Enter your data.

Tab page: Cash flow Tab page: Other flows; (enter data) Tab page: Status (⇒ Note correspondence fields)

⇒ Save

(Ignore the messages “No account assignment reference in transaction/No paymentdetails entered for transaction” by pressing “Enter”).

Transaction no. ________________

3-2 To analyze your data in Cash Management:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Cash Management⇒ Information System⇒ Reports for Cash Management⇒ Liquidity Analyses⇒ Liquidity Forecast

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 177: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 115

Field name or data type ValuesCompany code TRXX

Liquidity forecast Only set indicator here

Grouping PERSONEN(Customers/vendors andclearing accounts)

Delta display with balances (Click All selections button)

⇒ Execute

You see: Summarization: RevenuesGroups: E2

Levels: Time deposits

Double-click amount:Evaluation view of Treasury transactions to be triggered.

Additional Cash Management analysis:

Field name or data type Values

Company code TRXX

Cash position Set indicator

Liquidity forecast Set indicator

Grouping GESAMT (Total display)

Delta display with balances (Click All selections button)

⇒ Execute

You see: Summarization: Bank account history: No change

Cust./vend. & clearing accts: Groups: E2Levels: Time deposits

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 178: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 116

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

4-1 To specify the correspondence type for your business partner:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Master Data⇒ Standing Instructions⇒ Correspondence

Enter your data ... (Money market: Set an indicator for ‘Print’ and ‘CConf’)⇒ Save

4-2 4-2-1 To check the general ledger account and the payment details (for the old transaction).

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Change

Enter your data ...

• Check general ledger account:Tab page: Administration; The drop-down menu for the account assignmentreference field is for information purposes; leave field blank

• Check payment detailsTab page: Payment details (Note: No payment details have been assigned inthe old transaction (which was created before payment details were assigned tothe business partner!))

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 179: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 117

4-2-2 To define standing instructions for your business partner (partnerXX):

⇒ Accounting... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Master Data⇒ Standing Instructions⇒ Payment DetailsEnter your data ...

Field name or data type ValuesCurrency UNI

Payment details ID E.g. 01

House bank DB

Account ID GIRUN

Assign: Select row; Click: Assign (Money market, Securities, and Derivatives:Incoming; outgoing)

⇒ SaveNote: For simplification purposes, we assume that partner XX is the housebank.

4-2-3 To check general ledger account and payment details (for old transaction):

Path: see 4-2-1

• Check general ledger account: No changes

• Check payment details: No changes(This is because any payment details entered later (as standinginstructions) for the business partner are not updated in the oldtransaction!)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 180: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 118

4-3 To create a new fixed-term deposit:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Trading⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Create

Enter data:- Account assignment reference:

Tab page: Administration: leave blank- Payment details;

Tab page: Payment detailsOmit entry since the payment details defined for the business partner(as standing instructions) appear automatically.

⇒ SaveTransaction no. ____________________

4-4 4-4-1 To generate letters of confirmation:

⇒ Accounting... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Correspondence⇒ Outgoing Correspondence

Field name or data type Values

Company code TRXX

Transaction Your transaction number

Correspondence type 001

⇒ Select printer and print preview⇒ Execute

⇒ Print

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 181: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 119

After the update run, you can now see the correspondence information in thetransaction:

⇒ Accounting... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office (or Trading)⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Display

Tab page: StatusCorrespondence: “Confirmation executed”

4-4-2 To enter a counterconfirmation:

⇒ ... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Correspondence⇒ Incoming Confirmations

Enter: Exact data that you see on the letter of counterconfirmation from yourbusiness partner.

(Choose Enter: The transaction is displayed, assigned, and the confirmation statusin the transaction is matched).

⇒ Save

Check correspondence status in the transaction: See the path above

4-5 To settle a fixed-term deposit:

⇒ Accounting⇒ ... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Collective Processing⇒ Money Market

Here, you can make any selections you require.⇒ Execute

Select transaction ⇒ Choose Settle

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 182: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 120

• Check account assignment reference and general ledger account:Tab page: AdministrationDrop-down menu for “Account assignment reference” fieldYou see: Account assignment reference ‘DB000001’ with G/L account no.__________Enter: Account assignment reference (DB000001)⇒ Save

• If required: When you check the G/L account:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Financial Accounting⇒ General Ledger⇒ Master Records⇒ Individual Processing⇒ CentrallyEnter: General ledger account no.: see above (113113)⇒ Display

• Check the payment details:Tab page: Payment detailsThe system automatically suggests the payment transactions via our house bankDB and the house bank account GIRUN for amounts in UNI.

• Saving the transaction after you have checked it, triggers the activity transitionContract ⇒ Contract settlement (you can also see this in Collectiveprocessing: Refresh)

Additional information: View history:- When you are in the collective processing function: Select the transaction in the

display screen; Choose: History.Otherwise:

⇒ ... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office or Trading⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ History

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 183: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 121

4-6/7 To analyze the impact on Cash Management:

Since payment details exist for the (new) fixed-term deposit, the cash flows aredisplayed as follows:

• In the Liquidity forecast with bank data:(“Cash position” and “Liquidity forecast” are selected; Grouping: Totaldisplay; Delta display with balances)

You see: Summarization: 1. Bank account history

Groups: DBGIROLevels: Time deposits

Here you see the new transactionand

2. Customers/vendors and clearing accountsGroups: E2

Levels: Time depositsHere you see the old transaction

In the cash position: Grouping: Bank account history (Delta display withbalances)

You see: Summarization: Deutsche

Accounts: DBGIROLevels: Time deposits

Here you (only) see the new transaction

In the Liquidity forecast: (Grouping: Customers/vendors and clearingaccounts; Delta display with balances)

You see: Summarization: RevenuesGroups: E2 (domestic customers)

Levels: Time depositsHere you only see the old transaction

Summary:

• If no payment details are assigned to the transaction (either as standinginstructions with the business partner or when a transaction is created),money market transactions do not appear in the cash position, as this relatesto the bank data. In this case (no payment details), you only see moneymarket transactions in the liquidity status if a relevant financial planninggroup has been defined for the business partner.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 184: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 122

• (Example: old transaction; business partner has planning group: E2).

The transaction does not appear in Cash Management without the paymentdetails or the planning group.

• When you assign payment details to the transaction, the system can accessbank data and display the money market transaction in the cash position.(Example: new transaction)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 185: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 123

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

5-1 Fixed-term deposit:

5-1-1 To look at the cash flow:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ (Trading or) Back Office⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ DisplayTab page: Cash flow

You see: Posting status (PS): 1 - Flagged for posting(since transaction has been settled but not yet posted).

Also select the Posting view layout.

5-1-2 To post the first flows (the principal increase):

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Accounting⇒ Posting⇒ Execute

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 186: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 124

Enter your data ...

Field name or data type ValuesCompany code TRXX

Transaction Transaction no. of new fixed-term deposit

Upto and including due date Day the time deposit is created

⇒ ExecuteAfter the update run:

In the posting log: Single-click to call up the FI document.

FI document no.: _________________

Note: The date "upto and including the due date"refers to the dates of the flows for yourtransaction, which you now want to post.

Example:

§ Date of the investment amount:The investment amount is now posted.

§ Due date:The investment amount, the repayment amount, the interest andany other flows are now posted.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 187: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 125

5-1-3 To see the posting status in the cash flow:

Path: see 5-1-1

You see: (Posting status (PS) 0 for flows created)Posting status (PS) 1 for settled flowsPosting status (PS) 2 for posted flows

Also select the Posting view layout.

5-2 To look in Cash Management:

In the Liquidity forecast w i t h bank data:

("Cash position" and "Liquidity forecast" selected; Grouping: "Totaldisplay"; Delta display with balances)

You see: Summarization: 1. Banks

Groups: DBZWIBULevels: Int. post

Here you see the new transaction

and (unchanged, as it is not yet posted)2. Customers/vendors and clearing accounts

Groups: E2Levels: Time deposits:

Here you see the old transaction.

When you post the fixed-term deposit, the display in Cash Management changes fromthe "DBGIRO" account ("Time deposits" level) to the "DBZWIBU" account ("Interimposting" level), in order to display the fixed-term deposit as a ‘fixed transaction’. At thesame time the change of level shows that only the real bank posting is still outstanding.This is updated in the system when the bank statement has been received.

If the bank statement has been created - either manually or automatically - andhence the transaction has been posted to the current account, the outflow for thefixed-term deposit is displayed in Cash Management in the "DBGIRO" account("FI banks" level).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 188: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 126

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

6-1 To create a fixed-term deposit:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Trading⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Create

Enter your data.

6-2 To post the investment amount:

First settle the transaction:⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Fixed-Term Deposit⇒ Settle

Enter: Data (for last transaction); check (do the account assignment referenceand payment details exist?)⇒ Save

Now: post the flow:⇒ ... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Accounting⇒ Posting⇒ ExecuteEnter your data

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 189: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 127

The "upto and including due date" field refers to the date up towhich the remaining flows will be posted.(In this case, it is the date the fixed-term deposit was created)

6-3 To perform an accrual/deferral run on 12/31/YY:

⇒ ... ⇒ Money Market⇒ Accounting⇒ Accrual/Deferral⇒ Execute

Enter: Data ... (Key date: 12/31/YY ...); Execute

You see: Accrual/deferral log and posting logAfter the update run:Click the document numbers to display the relevantposting documents.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 190: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 128

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

7-1 To check the standing instructions:

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Master Data⇒ Standing Instructions⇒ Payment Details

Enter the following data:

a) Assign existing payment details "01" for UNI to foreign exchange: Select row;click the Assign button (Foreign exchange: Incoming; Outgoing)

b) For USD:

Field name or data type Values

Currency USD

Payment details ID E.g. 01US

House bank DB

Acct ID GIRUS

Select row; click the Assign button (Foreign exchange: Incoming; Outgoing)

c) Save

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 191: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 129

7-2 To create a forward rate transaction:

a) Create order (Trading)

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Trading⇒ Spot/Forward Transaction⇒ Create

Enter your data ...(- Purchase currency, payment amount;- Sale currency;Rate; value date)

Note: Confirm your entries with "Enter". The system then calculates theoffsetting amount (in this case, upon sale) automatically. Onlythen should you save the transaction.

- Cash Management:⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Cash Management⇒ Information System⇒ Reports for Cash Management⇒ Liquidity Analyses⇒ Cash Position

Enter: Data ... (Grouping: Banks; Click All selections: Delta Display withbalances;)

You see: No change when you create an order.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 192: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 130

b) Execute order (Trading):

⇒ ... ⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Trading⇒ Order⇒ ExecuteEnter your data ...; Save

- Cash Management: See the above path.

You see the foreign exchange purchase.

Summarization: Deutsche[In this case, you only see the difference between the value of the forward rate inUNI and foreign currency amount at the current exchange rate];

The individual amounts appear as follows:

Accounts:- DB-USD; Levels: Forex- DBGIRO; Levels: Forex

Note: The dollar amount is displayed in UNI and is calculated at the rate that ismaintained in the rates table (in Customizing):

⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Environment⇒ Market Data⇒ Manual Market Data Entry⇒ Enter Exchange Rates

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 193: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 131

c) Settle contract (Back office):

⇒ ... ⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Back Office⇒ Spot/Forward Transaction⇒ SettleEnter your data ... (Check and save entry data).

- Cash Management: see above.

You see the foreign exchange purchase:

Summarization: Deutsche;Accounts: - DB-USD; Levels: Forex

- DBGIRO; Levels: Forex

d) Posting to FI (Accounting)

⇒ ... ⇒ Foreign Exchange⇒ Accounting⇒ Posting⇒ Execute

Enter your data.

- Cash Management: see above.

You see the foreign exchange purchase:Summarization: Deutsche;

Accounts: DBZWIBULevels: Int. post

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 194: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 132

Unit: Liquidity Management in the Short and MediumTerm

8-1 To create and settle fixed-term deposits and forward rate transactions: Compare previous solutions;Note: The payment details that are maintained for the business partner CITI. Youhave to generate payment requests for netting; set up the payment detailsaccordingly.

8-2 To display the proposal list for netting and for assigning transactions:

Some prerequisites for possible nettings are:- Same business partner- Same value date- Same currency (compare slide on netting and payment requests

⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Netting⇒ Proposal List⇒ Execute

Select transactions for netting.Click the Check button

⇒ Save

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 195: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 133

To display the netting:⇒ Accounting⇒ Treasury⇒ Treasury Management⇒ Money Market⇒ Back Office⇒ Netting⇒ Display

Field name or data type Values

Netting 1

Your company code TRXX

One of your transactions

Note the net amount calculated by the system.This is then paid in a later payment run in one record.

Relevant fields in the transactions are blocked against furtherchanges.

8-3 To perform a posting run:⇒ Accounting⇒ Posting⇒ Execute

Enter and execute the transaction numbers of the money market and forwardexchange transaction.The posting run triggers payment requests to the payments request clearingaccount. These are paid jointly via the payment run of the extended paymentprogram (payment request).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 196: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium andLong Term

Contents:l Securities Management

l Loans Management

(Loans taken)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 197: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Provide an overview of the entire process for

- financial investments in the form of securities transactions

and

- procuring capital by taking out a loan

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 198: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview

Liquidity Management in theShort and Medium Term

Introduction

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long TermFinancial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term

Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

Course Overview Diagram

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 199: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Securities Management Scenario

l Due to a change in the level of interest rates on the capital market,you want to restructure your securities position. Reduce your stockportfolio and invest in bonds.To purchase new securities, you have to enter the correspondingdata. In other words, you maintain position indicator class data andsecurities account data, if required.During the course of the year you receive and post interest anddividends.At the end of the year, you perform an account-based valuation ofyour securities position.

l Other means of long-term investment is procured by taking out aloan.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 200: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

Market RiskManagement

Treasury and Market Risk Management

Priority Priority TargetTarget1 Ensure liquidity 952 Optimize financing costs 923 Optimize yields on financial assets 744 Hedge costs (e.g. against possible exchange rate fluctuations) 615 Hedge sales (e.g. against possible exchange rate fluctuations) 526 Contribute to profit through active

management of open items 30

TR-TMTR-TMTR-TR-

MRMMRM

TreasuryManagement

%

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 201: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

Treasury Management: Functions

l Complete financial transaction and positionmanagementn Support for trading and back-office functions

n Functions to track, check, and release transactions

n Data transfer to Financial Accounting(including accruals/deferrals and valuation)

l Flexible settings to accommodate company-specifictransaction and position management processes

l Financial transactions assigned to portfolios andmanaged in securities accounts

l Flexible reporting and portfolio analysis

l Datafeed interface

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 202: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 7

SAP AG 1999

Securities

Subscription rightsFixed-interest bondsVariable rate bonds

Perpetual bondsZero bonds

Unit-quoted part. cert.Perc.-quoted part. cert.

Warrant bondsPart. cert. with option

Convertible bondsIndex warrantsEquity warrants

Currency warrantsBond warrants

Perc.-quoted shareholdings

Domestic stocks

Investment certificatesForeign stocks

Unit-quoted shareholdings

010 Stocks

020 Investment cert.

030 Subscr. rights

040 Bonds

060 Warrant bonds

070 Convert.bonds

160 Shareholdings

110 Warrants

Financial instruments Product categories Product typesExamples

Product Categories - Product Types

n You use product types as a basis for creating financial transactions and managing positions.

n In the SAP System, you classify the financial instrument "security" by assigning it to productcategories that are predefined in the system. You use this classification as a basis for a more detailedstructure by defining corresponding product types in accordance with specific companyrequirements.

n The modular structure of financial instruments enables you to create different evaluations ordetermine processing sequences according to product type. For example, the product type "Fixed-interest bond" is different from the product type "Variable-rate bond" as far as the conditions areconcerned. This difference is taken into account by product type-specific entry screens for creatingmaster data, which simplify data entry and prevent inconsistencies.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 203: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 8

SAP AG 1999

PTyp Text Prod. categ. Cond.gr

01A Stocks 10 10

02A Investment certificates 20 30

: : : :

04I Fixed-interest bonds 40 40

: : : :

Double-click DetailsDouble-click Details

Class Master Data: Product Types - General Data

n Product types are user-defined values for predefined product categories, which is why when youdefine a product type, you must specify the product category to which you are assigning it. Thesystem uses this internal key to process the objects defined in the product type.

n You can usually differentiate between product types by means of different condition structures.For example, dividend and/or bonus conditions belong to the product type stock; nominal interestand repayment conditions belong to the product type bonds. By assigning the relevant conditions tothe product type, you can ensure that you only have to enter the corresponding condition items whenyou create a security.

It is possible for several product types to have the same conditions, depending on the degree of detailin which you define the various product types. If, for example, you define the product types domesticstocks and foreign stocks, you can use the condition types dividend and bonus in both cases.

As a result, condition types (that belong together) are grouped to form condition groups. Thissimplifies the lengthy process of assigning multiple condition types. You assign the relevantcondition group to the product type.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 204: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 9

SAP AG 1999

USER LEVEL

1104 Scheduled repayment5000 Nominal

interest5013 Dividend

010 Stock

040 Bond ...

01 A Stock

04 H Variable-rate bonds04 I Fixed-interest bonds ...

10 Stocks40 Fixed-int. sec.(perc.-quot.)42 Float.-int. sec.(perc.-quot.)

A InflowTD DividendsTTEN Final repaymentTZ Nominal interest

Key : “ ” = is assigned to

111 Dividend113 Bonus100 Interest (perc.)263 Final repayment

...

Product Type - Conditions - FlowsProduct Type - Conditions - Flows

Product categoryProduct category Flow categoryFlow category

Flow typeFlow typeCondition typeCondition typeProduct typeProduct type

Condition groupCondition group

A InflowTD DividendsTTEN Final repaymentTZ Nominal interest

Calculation cat.Calculation cat.

SYSTEM LEVEL

n You assign a condition group, which represents a cluster of different condition types, to each producttype.

n The system represents cash flows created by conditions as flows that are generated automatically.This means you must assign flow types to condition types, when these flow types represent changesto the payment flows and are part of the cash flow.

n Flow types defined at user level contain more detailed information about the flow categoriespredefined in the system.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 205: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 10

SAP AG 1999

l In our model company the treasurer uses position analysis toobtain an overview of the securities position. This describes thestatus (position of stocks and bonds) of the two securitiesaccounts.

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term:Scenario - Evaluating the Securities Position

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 206: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 11

SAP AG 1999

Position overview* Position trend list* Capital recovery (revenue list)*

Securities account statementPosition information

Standard reports

Standard Reports: Examples (Securities)

Examples:

n Position overview: Position evaluation for a specific key date (flexible data output)

n Position trend list: Lists the acquisition values, number of units/nominal values, book values on astart and final date, and displays the relevant changes.

n Revenue list: Displays the capital flows relating to securities. You can select both the planned oractual flows, e.g. to evaluate the realized earnings and anticipated earnings, such interest or pricegains.

n Securities account statement: Displays the position trend for specific securities accounts for eachsecurity, including the changes in the book value and the acquisition value.

n Position information for securities: Tells you for which ID numbers and in which securities accountsposition indicators exist for a specific key date. Detailed information such as average bookvalue/acquisition value for each ID number in foreign currency and local currency.

n Regulatory reporting: Evaluations of positions in accordance with reporting requirements andGerman State Central Bank requirements.

n * You can use the data output options described later for these reports.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 207: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 12

SAP AG 1999

Classical drilldown report

A B C18,234.97 27,276.08 87,751.8429,932.07 38,373.42 32,756.44

... ... ...

Object list

Graphical report output

0

20

40

60

80

100

A B C D

Reports

n Many evaluations allow to choose between several forms of data output.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 208: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 13

SAP AG 1999

Sample Evaluation using Position Information

n Position overview: Flexible position information for a specific keydate, e.g. per company code or per ID number

n Evaluation of a portfolio comprising two securities accounts kept withdifferent banks

l The securities account is the unit generally used for positionmanagement and valuation (usually at a bank)

l A portfolio is a grouping of financial transactions and positionsused for aggregated position management or valuation purposes

n You can perform valuations both at securities account level andportfolio level

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 209: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 14

SAP AG 1999

0SEPOSOVW SE Position overviewFrom date MM/DD/YYYYDisplay currency UNIKey date reference 4 position value dateKey date MM/DD/YYCompany code TR00

Pos. ID number Sec.acct No. of sec. TotNomPC Price% Acq.c.un.PC Acq.c. PC Book value PC Book value LC Current value PC Current value LCEUR 113495 Deuba Acc1 200,000.00 102.10 204,200.00 204,200.00 399,380.49 225,000.00 446,907.15EUR 113501 150,000.00 95.00 142,500.00 142,500.00 278,705.78 166,755.00UNI 270144 100,000.00 99.85 99,850.00 99,850.00 99,850.00 102,550.00

Deuba Acc1 450,000.00 777,936.27EUR 519000 Deuba Acc2 5,000.00 27.30 136,500.00 124,250.00 243,011.88 134,250.00 262,570.18UNI 555700 10,000.00 74.65 746,500.00 746,500.00 746,500.00 912,000.00 912,000.00

102,550.00326,144.43

875,601.58

EUR 716463 500.00 398.57 199,285.00 199,285.00 389,767.58 206,275.00 403,438.83Deuba Acc2 15,500.00 1,379,279.46 1,578,009.01

Securities: Position Overview Object List

n You can use the ABAP List Viewer to set up the position overview as you wish according to certainpredefined selection criteria. You can make your own adjustments to the report, depending on theinformation you want to display and the order in which you want to display it.

n You can either mail or fax the list, and convert it to other formats (such as a word processing file, orspreadsheet).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 210: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 15

SAP AG 1999

l The treasurer in our model company decides to sell a particular stock.Taking account of the company's medium-term liquidity, the part-saleof this stock is represented, thus demonstrating the typical businessprocess involved in buying and selling securities.This example shows the changes to the position and the impact on theportfolio and securities account structures.Once the transaction has been concluded, you can see both the impactof the stock on the cash flow and the updated incoming cash flows inCash Management.

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Concluding Securities Transactions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 211: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 16

SAP AG 1999

SecAcct1

7.5 % 10-year federal bond6.25 % 10-year federal bond 10-year federal bond

Portfolio 1

Proportion of stocks too high

Shift to bonds

SecAcct2

Telekom stockBMW stockSAP stock

Sample Evaluation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 212: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 17

SAP AG 1999

Due to portfolio restructuring, you should sell Telekom stocks IDnumber 5557XX to favor fixed-interest securities.n Part sale of ID number 5557XX from securities account 2

n Settle and post transaction

n Transaction status described by activity category

n Control processing sequence using processing categories

n View transaction in cash position

Part Sale of Stocks

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 213: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 18

SAP AG 1999

n Postingsn Payment transactionsn Reversalsn Accruals/deferralsn Valuation

n Create order/contractn Exercise/expirationn Exercise rights

User authorizationLimit management

Release

n Settlement/controln Interest rate adjustmentn Nettingn Referencen Confirmation lettersn Securities account transfersn Corporate actions

TradingTrading Back officeBack office AccountingAccounting

Transaction and Position Management Process

n Transaction and position management processes are split into the following areas:

You use the trading area mainly for creating transactions and exercising rights.

In the back-office area, you settle the transactions you have entered, in other words, you controlthem. You also manage the processes relating to position management, such as securities accounttransfers.

The accounting area includes posting activities. Examples of these are incoming payments postings(such as interest earned or dividends) or depreciation postings that result from a position valuation.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 214: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 19

SAP AG 1999

Partner master data

Securities account master data

Position indicator per ID number and per securities account

Transaction management

Position management (if appropriate)Position management (if appropriate)

Transaction Management: Prerequisites

Class master data

Basic data Conditions Other data

You create master data for the following areas:

n Business partner: In addition to the minimum data entries (name and address) in the masterrecord, you have to define the role of the business partner.

n Class: You have to enter master data for each security managed in the position. This is aprerequisite for any position changes in the trading and back office areas. Class master datacontains all the general structure characteristics of securities as well as product-specificconditions. You can create links between securities by entering references. For example, youcan define the relationship between old and new stock by entering a suitable reference.

n Securities account: You manage and administer securities positions in securities accounts.

n Position indicator: You define the parameters for position management and valuation in thecompany code for all securities for each specific securities account.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 215: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 20

SAP AG 1999

SEC

III Create settlecontract

Trading Back office Accounting

II Create order execute

IV Create contract

post

post

post

Process View: Trading - Back Office - Accounting

I Create order execute settle post

n The transaction management function offers two main initial variants for entering transactions. Theorganizational process can be divided into several steps:

n Creating an order (changing/adding to order data, if necessary)

n Executing an order or creating a contract

n Settling the executed order or contract

n Posting the transaction

n You specify your preferred transaction entry process in Customizing.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 216: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 21

SAP AG 1999

Basic Principles of Transaction ManagementBasic Principles of Transaction Management

USER LEVEL

Product typeProduct type

Product categoryProduct category010 Stock

:040 Bond

:

- Purchase- Sale- Forwardpurchase

- Forward sale :

Transaction typeTransaction type

Transaction cat.Transaction cat.100 Purchase

200 Sale

Activity categoryActivity category10 Order

20 Contract :

1 Order - Contract

2 Order - Contract - Settlement

Processing cat.Processing cat.

SYSTEM LEVEL

- Fully-paid stock- Partly-paid stock :- Varios- Fixed-interest bond

:

n Product categories cover the basic types of financial borrowing and investment transactions andrepresent a classification of financial transactions. Product categories are predefined in the system,apply to all company codes, and may not be modified by the user.Product types represent a refinement of the product categories at user level and, unlike the productcategories, they can be defined by the user.

n You set up the processing sequence of a financial transaction in the Securities area using processingcategories.

n Processing categories determine the sequence of the individual activities within a financialtransaction. They describe the processing steps involved in the respective areas of the company -from entering a transaction in the trading area, via processing it in the back-office area, through totransferring the data to Financial Accounting.

n As a result, you determine the company-specific chain of activities that a particular transaction has topass through.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 217: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 22

SAP AG 1999

Company code TR00ID numberTransactn type

5557XX

200 SaleDeuba Deutsche Bank

Dt. Telekom

Partner

Activity

Order O Contract

Transaction External number assignment

Create Order: Initial Screen

n You go to the main menu for the Securities area by choosing Accounting => Treasury => TreasuryManagement => Securities.

n When you create a security transaction, you are representing an order or a contract for the sale orpurchase of securities. You specify the class and the business partner to/from which securities are tobe bought or sold.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 218: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 23

SAP AG 1999

Create Order

Structure

Stock swapBasic dataSecurities acct

Order date

Deuba Acc2

No. of units

Stock swapLimitLimit type

Limit date

Dmax,Pmin

01/31/YY

Limit price 90.00

Partner Deuba

Stock swapTradingTrader Maier Stock swap

Contract dataContact person Mr. Brown

01/20/YY

3,000.00

Company codeID numberTransaction type

TR005557XX200 Activity Order

Transaction data includes:

n Basic data:

ü Here, you enter the nominal amount for percentage-quoted securities and the number of units forunit-quoted securities. (You can find out whether a security is unit-quoted or percentage-quoted inthe class master data of the relevant ID number).

ü The order date indicates when the order was issued/created.

n Limit data: Here, for example, you can enter a suitable minimum/maximum price and a date up towhich the order is effective.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 219: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 24

SAP AG 1999

Execute Order

Structure

AktientauschPositionSec. account

Position excl.

Deuba Acc2

Position incl.

AktientauschDate detailsPos. value date

Calculation date

MM/22/YY

-1

Payment date 0

Partner Deuba

AktientauschAmountsNumber of units

10,000.00

7,000.00

Company codeID numberTransaction type

TR005557XX200 Activity Contract

UNI

UNI

UNI

3,000.00

Price 92.00

Payment amount UNI276,000.00

n To execute an order after you have placed a purchase/sales order, you have to enter this change in thesystem.

n To do this, you execute the order. You have to add to or change the existing order entries by enteringthe actual transaction data. For example, you enter the actual execution price.

n Date details (in the sample data, the system assumes you want to execute the order the day the orderis placed):- The position value date tells you when the position is available in the system (usually order date plus 2 days).- Calculation date: relevant for financial mathematics as regards the conditions. This date enables you to calculate, for example, the interest accrued for interest-bearing securities and indicates the last day the vendor is entitled to earn interest (usually order date plus 1 day).- When you execute an order, the payment date refers to the day you post the payment amount and update the transaction to Cash Management. (usually order date plus 2 days).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 220: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 25

SAP AG 1999

- Basic data- Other flows- Cash flow- Any payment details- Correspondence

l Control:

l (Any release that is necessary)

Back Office: Overview

n You settle transactions in the back-office area. This settlement satisfies control purposes: Thetransaction data is checked, and data is added, if required.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 221: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 26

SAP AG 1999

CoCd Transactn Activity cat. Trans.type Name ID number Short name Sec. account Unit PriceTR00 353 Contract 200 Sale 5557XX Telekom Deuba Acc2 3,000.00 92TR00 354 Order 100 Purchase 716463 SAP Deuba Acc2 1,000.00 510.1

Settle ReverseOrder expiration Cash flow History

Collective Processing: List

n The collective processing function enables you to process transactions efficiently.

n From the collective processing list, you can branch to the relevant transaction, to the cash flow, or tothe history. You can also use a number of important processing functions: For example, you canchange, settle, or reverse the transactions you have selected.

n The collective processing function provides you with a flexible list display via the ABAP ListViewer. You can:

- Define and save your own display variants- Sort according to any field- Filter according to any values- Form group totals

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 222: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 27

SAP AG 1999

Company code TRXXID number 5557XXSecurities acct Deuba Acc1

Pos.val.date FType Name FStat No. units Curr. Sttlmnt amnt Sett.curr.01/21/YYYY 1000 Purchase I 10,000.00 UNI 746,500.00 UNI

3012 Comm. not cap. I 0.00 UNI 1,000.00 UNI05/16/YYYY 2000 Sale P 3,000.00 UNI 276,000.00 UNI

8114 Sec. price gain P 0.00 UNI 52,050.00 UNI07/21/YYYY 5013 Dividend P 7,000.00 UNI 10,500.00 UNI

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Double-click - details

Securities Account Cash Flow

n The securities account cash flow reflects the cash flow for a company code for one ID number in aparticular securities account. Double-click on any item to display more detailed information.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 223: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 28

SAP AG 1999

Post Transaction

TransactionTransaction

postpostpost

Posting logPosting log40 113105 276,000.00 UNI D40 113105 276,000.00 UNI D5050 4504445044 276,000.00 UNI 276,000.00 UNI CC

Accounting Accounting document created in FI document created in FI 113105

276,000.00 133020

276,000.00

n When you post a transaction, the system generates a posting log showing you what the FinancialAccounting document will look like.

n You must ensure that the relevant accounts and the required document types already exist inFinancial Accounting for the posting activities.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 224: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 29

SAP AG 1999

Company codeID numberSecurities account....

Posting dataSEC posting doc. no.Fl document number

toto

toto

...

....

...

...

TR00

execute

CoCd Daybk no. ID number SecAcc FType Name PC amnt Pos.curr.

TR00 000000056 5557XX Deuba 1 200 Sale 276,000.00 UNI

double-click to FI document

Pstg date Doc. no. PK Debit acct PK Credit acct

05/18/YY 100000132 40 113105 50 133020

General selections

5557XX

Position Management Posting Journal: View

n The position management posting journal in the securities area gives you detailed information aboutall the flows that have been posted according to the selection criteria entered. Double-click thedocument number to branch directly to the FI document.

n The posting journal offers you a flexible list display via the ABAP List Viewer. You can:

- Define and save your own display variants- Sort according to any field- Filter according to any values- Form group totals

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 225: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 30

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Concluding Securities Transactions Integration to Cash Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 226: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 31

SAP AG 1999

Incorrect chronological orderPurchase stock100 units @ 230

IncorrectIncorrectprice lossprice loss

New price loss 6000 planned(60 x 100 units sold)

t

Price gain/loss determined as 6000 actualPrice gain/loss determined as 6000 actualNo further postings possible during this periodNo further postings possible during this period

Period-end closing

Purchase stock100 units @ 270

Sell stock100 units @ 190

Price loss 8000 planned (80 x 100 units sold)

New ave. price 250

Period-End Closing: Securities

n Realized price gains/losses from sales of securities are initially kept in the system as planned records.This ensures that price gains/losses are always recalculated even if sales and purchases of securitiesare not entered in the system in chronological order.

n Period-end closing concludes a period in the past, posts the current up-to-date price gains/losses, andensures that no further purchases or sales are posted during this period.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 227: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 32

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Create Class Master Data

l Having decided to invest the funds in a new bond, our modelcompany now has to specify the class master data for this bond.After purchasing the bond using the funds available, it reviews theportfolio/securities account evaluations and the impact on CashManagement.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 228: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 33

SAP AG 1999

l Security ID number: 2132xx

l Term: 10/21/YYYY - 10/20/YY+10

l Interest rate: 5.25 %

l Issue price: 100%

Class Data Notation

New bond with the following conditions:

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 229: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 34

SAP AG 1999

USER LEVEL

SYSTEM LEVEL

010 Stock :

040 Bond :

- Fully-paid stock- Partly-paid stock- Variable-ratebond

- Fixed-interestsecurity . .

SAP comm.SAP pref.

Federal bond . . .

Class

Product typeProduct type ClassClass

Product categoryProduct category

n Purchases and sales are the main types of transactions in the securities area. Each security traded onthe capital market is described by its class. Class (master) data contains all the characteristic data of asecurity that stays the same regardless of the transaction.

Example 1: The nominal value, the stock type (common stock), or the stock form (old stock) aredefined for class SAP common stock.

Example 2: The issue start, the due date, and the interest structure are defined for class 6 % Federalbond 1996II/2006.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 230: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 35

SAP AG 1999

nn StockStocknn Subscription rightSubscription rightnn InvestmentInvestment

certificatecertificate

nn Equity warrantsEquity warrantsnn Currency warrantsCurrency warrantsnn Bond warrantsBond warrantsnn Index warrantsIndex warrants

nn BondBondnn Warrant bondWarrant bondnn Convertible bondConvertible bond

Class

nn ShareholdingShareholding

Classes: Product Categories - Overview

n You create each security with a specific ID number and assign it to a product type. Each product typeis based on one of the product categories predefined in the system.

You can create class master data for each product type for the following product categories:Stocks, subscription rights, investment certificates, bonds, warrant bonds, convertible bonds, equitywarrants, currency warrants, bond warrants, index warrants, and shareholdings.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 231: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 36

SAP AG 1999

Create Class: Bond

ID number 2132XX

Names

Short name Fixed-interest bond 96/06

Search crit.

Fixed-interest bond 96/06

Classification...Product category 040 Bond

Product type 041 Fixed-interest bonds

n The class master data for bonds comprises basic data, conditions, and other data.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 232: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 37

SAP AG 1999

Create Class: Bonds - Basic Data

Stock swap

ID number Fixed-interest bond 96/062132XX

Basic data

IssueIssuer

Issue currency

West LB

UNI

Nominal value 1,000.00 Nominal per TU 1,000.00

Westdeutsche Landesbank

Structure

Quotation Perc.-quoted

Security type Bearer security

End of term

Issue rate 100.0000

Issue start 10/21/YYYY 10/21/YY+10

n The class master data for bonds comprises basic data, conditions, and other data.

n Selected fields in the basic data screen for bonds are described below:

Nominal value: Nominal value per individual security.

Nom.per trading unit: Minimum nominal value that can be traded

Quotation: Percentage-quotedUnit-quoted

Security type: E.g. Bearer securityRegistered securityRegistered security with limited transferability

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 233: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 38

SAP AG 1999

Create Class: Conditions

ID number 2132XX

Conditions

Stock swapInterest calculation

Int. calc. method Act/ActP

Calc. datePercentEff. fromCondition type text

Condition items

Interest 10/21/YYYY 5.25 10/20/YY+1 12

CR

1

Due date

10/21/YY+1

CR Frq

Fixed-interest bond 96/06

Stock swapRepayment

Repayment type Maturity

Curr.

UNI

Final repayment 10/21/YYYY 0.00 10/20/YY+10 0110/21/YY+10UNI

n A condition item consists of several entries for a condition type.

n Selected fields in the conditions screen for bonds are described below:

- Effective from: Date from which the condition is valid

- Percent: Nominal interest rate

- Calculation date: Last day when interest is calculated in the current interest period

- Due date: Day when the interest payment is due

- Calendar rule (CR): The calendar rule allows you to shift the relevant date entries

to a working day, if required.

Examples: 0 : No shift

1 : Following working day

3 : Previous working day

Shifting the due date to a working day makes it easier to reconcile the accounts when interestpayments are made. The calculation date is the basis for the financial mathematical activities. Itis fixed and is usually managed by calendar rule "0".

- Frequency (Frq): Number of months in the interest-paying period

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 234: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 39

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Creating Class Master Data

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 235: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 40

SAP AG 1999

Alternative I:

Bank account

Dividends Nominal interest P

Bank clearing account I

automatic posting

Account statement

Bank clearing to revenue

Bank to bank clearing

FI

Automatic Posting I

n The automatic posting function enables you to automatically process flows that occur regularlywhose dates and amounts are fixed in advance. It can be used, for instance, for posting interest,dividend or repayment flows, in other words, flows generated by the conditions.

n Planned records must exist (such as planned records for interest received) before you can performautomatic posting. In principle, you can process flow types belonging to all flow categories here.

n To use the automatic posting run, you first have to post all the flows that change the position for theID numbers and securities accounts you have selected up to the due date you want the automaticposting to take place.

n There are two procedures for processing regularly recurring flows:- Alternative I:When you use the one-step procedure, you post the flows directly to the bank clearing accounts.These are cleared in Financial Accounting when the account statement is imported.- Alternative II:When you use the two-step procedure, you first post the expected payments to receivables accounts.

After the account statement has been imported, the bank clearing accounts are cleared in subledgeraccounting and the incoming payment is triggered.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 236: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 41

SAP AG 1999

1

1

IP

IP

F I

Dividend / Nominal interest P

automatic posting Receivables to income

Receivables account IBank clearing account P

Account statement Bank to bank clearing

Bank account

Incoming payment Bank clearing to Receivables

Bank clearing account I

Alternative II:

Automatic Posting II with Incoming Payments

n Two-step procedure:

In the first step, you post the selected planned records as actual records in Treasury using theautomatic posting function. The corresponding posting records are transferred automatically to G/Laccounting in FI (in this case, via the interim receivables accounts).At the same time, the system generates the corresponding planned records for incoming payments.

[In G/L accounting in FI, a cash receipt triggers posting to the bank clearing account.]

In the second step, the incoming payments planned records that were generated by the automaticposting function are posted as actual records in Treasury. The corresponding posting records aretransferred automatically to G/L accounting in FI. There, both the receivables account and the bankclearing account can be cleared.The incoming payments flows are generated in settlement currency and in position currency. Thismeans that you can also represent interest payments for euro bonds in USD.

n You use the incoming payments function to postprocess and post flows that were created using theautomatic posting function. Whereas the automatic posting function posts several activities together,you can only process one activity at a time when you use the incoming payments function. The samealso applies to manual posting as for the incoming payments function, in that you can only processflow types belonging to certain flow categories.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 237: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 42

SAP AG 1999

l As a result of the good conditions offered by one of the modelcompany's house banks, the company opens another securitiesaccount with this bank.Having discussed the various position management options, thecompany decides to assign the new securities account to the existingportfolio and to manage positions at portfolio level. The company buysand sells the newly-issued bond again for this new securities accountand focuses its attention on the updating of acquisition and bookvalues relating to the portfolio.

Defining Organizational Elements:Portfolios and Securities Accounts

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 238: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 43

SAP AG 1999

Company codeCompany codepositionposition

PortfolioPortfolioposition 1position 1

Sec. acctposition 1

Sec. acctposition 2

Singleitems

PortfolioPortfolioposition 1position 1

Securities Account and Portfolio

Singleitems

n Securities accounts are valuation and management units used for position management andvaluation. They are needed for all financial transactions that require position management. Thismainly applies to listed securities.

n You can carry out typical functions such as securities account statements, position evaluations, andtransfers on the basis of securities accounts. Securities accounts are usually linked to an existingsecurities account with a bank.

n A portfolio is an organizational entity within a company code which allows you to group certainfinancial transactions and positions and to perform aggregated position evaluations. You can also usethe portfolios as valuation units to calculate, for instance, the average price of the various purchaseprices paid for securities (average cost price).

n Portfolios also act as a risk management instrument for controlling and evaluating a company's riskpositions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 239: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 44

SAP AG 1999

Company code TR00

Portfolio Portfolio nameBESTAND_1 Securities portfolio 1BESTAND_2 Securities portfolio 2BOND Bond portfolioFXPORT Forex portfolioKREDIT Credit portfolioMONEY_1 Money market portfolio 1

U_UMLAUF Current assetsV_ANLAGE Fixed assetsMONEY_2 Money market portfolio 2

Treasury: Portfolio

TR00

Define Portfolios

n Portfolios are defined according to the company-specific requirements using the settings inCustomizing. One possible example is a trader portfolio.

n You assign financial transactions or positions to portfolios either directly via the entry for thetransaction or indirectly via securities accounts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 240: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 45

SAP AG 1999

Securities Account Master Data

Company codeSecurities accountSec. account name

Deuba Acc4

TRXX

Stock swapBank informationDepository bank

Sec. account no.

DEUBA

22224446Clearing account 445556XX

Deuba Securities Account 4

Stock swapHouse bankHouse bankHouse bank account

DB

GIRUN

Stock swapDisposition blockBlocking type

Block flag until

Stock swapAssignmentsBusiness areaPortfolio Portfolio 1

n The securities accounts you create in the SAP System are usually linked to an existing securitiesaccount with a bank.

n Below is a description of selected fields for the securities account master data:

Depository bank: Partner ID of the bank where the securities account is kept. You must first create the bank as a business partner in the role of "depository

bank".

Securities account no.: Number used to manage the securities account at the depository bank.

Clearing account: Account number of the cash clearing account at the depository bank.

House bank: Name of the bank at which the cash clearing account for the new securities account is kept.

House bank account: Name of the cash clearing account within the SAP System.

Blocking type: You have to enter the blocking type if a restraint on disposal applies to the entire securities account.

Block flag until: Date until which restraint on disposal applies to the securities account.

Portfolio: Securities accounts are assigned to a portfolio.You have to set the portfolio indicator in Customizing if you want this field

to be displayed.

Business area: The system uses the business area entered in the securities account master data when you post a transaction. If no entry is made, the system usesthe entry for the account assignment reference.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 241: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 46

n You can delete securities account master data if no position indicator and no transactions exist/haveexisted.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 242: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 47

SAP AG 1999

Company codeID number

TRXX

2132XX

Entering position management and valuation parameters:

Securities acct DEUBA ACC4

Master Data: Position Indicator - Initial Screen

n The position indicator determines how the positions relating to a specific ID number are to bemanaged and valued. For one ID number you can define this for both the entire company code andfor a specific securities account. To display the assignment for a securities account, you enter thecorresponding securities account in the selection screen.

n The position indicator is used mainly for assigning the account assignment reference (automatically,if required), and assigning the valuation and position management parameters.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 243: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 48

SAP AG 1999

Master Data: Position Indicator - Data

Company code

ID number

Securities account

TRXX

2132XX

SECACC4

Company code position data

Valuation class SEC FA

Exchange

Pos.mgt proc. Standard

Securities account position data

Valuation class SEC FA

Acct assign. ref. 42000000

Pos.mgt proc. Standard

Custody type

Frankfurt Stock Exchange

n Valuation class:

ü If portfolio valuation is not activated, you can set valuation parameters for this class that differfrom those defined in Customizing. You do this in the position indicator.

n Position management procedure:

ü The position management procedure determines whether price gains are calculated andamortization flows generated, and if so, how.

n Exchange:

ü Name of the exchange that is relevant for the securities valuation price.

n Account assignment reference:

ü Here, you define, for example, the securities balance sheet account.

n You also define the data that is relevant for the German regulatory reporting.

n In the position indicator, you can either maintain data just for the company code position or for thesecurities account position. In the latter case, the system calls up the data entered for the securitiesaccount. This means the securities account entries take preference.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 244: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 49

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Defining Organizational Elements:Securities Accounts and Position Indicators

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 245: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 50

SAP AG 1999

l In addition to the position management options already dealtwith, our model company needs to determine the (un)realizedgains and losses from securities transactions before it can drawup its balance sheet. Using the example of the bonds bought andsold so far, the typical processes for valuation and calculation ofthe related (un)realized gains/losses are described.

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Accounting Functions: Valuation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 246: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 51

SAP AG 1999

Portfolio 1

SecAcct 1 SecAcct 2

SingleSingleitemsitems

SingleSingleitemsitems

è for all securities accounts

è at portfolio level

è at securities account level

è for single items

Position Management Alternatives

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 247: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 52

SAP AG 1999

Position management Valuation categoriesUpdating acquisition values and book values

Portfolio 1

SecAcct 1 SecAcct 2

SingleSingleitemsitems

SingleSingleitemsitems

è For all securities accountsValuation category 20

è At portfolio levelValuation category 20 andportfolio indicator

è At securities account levelValuation category 21

è For single itemsValuation category 10

VC - Valuation category10 Zero bonds: Single analysis - manual allocation11 not supported ! Single analysis - Allocation via FIFO12 not supported ! Single analysis - Allocation via LIFO20 Position management for all sec. accts (and valuation)21 Position management for spec. sec.accts (and valuation)

Position Management and Valuation Categories

n The position management function in the securities component is controlled by the assignment ofvaluation categories. You can manage positions for all securities accounts, at portfolio or securitiesaccount level, or per individual item.

n The acquisition values and book values are calculated automatically when you assign valuationcategories.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 248: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 53

SAP AG 1999

Not disclosed

Disclosedup to

key date value

NotNotdiscloseddisclosed

Scenario 2

DisclosedDisclosedupup to max. to max.

acquisition valueacquisition value

Scenario 4

Disclosed Disclosed upup to tokey date valuekey date value

Scenario 1

Gains

Losses

Scenario 3

Scenario 6

Scenario 5

Valuation Principles (One-Step): Scenarios

n In the securities area, gains lead to write-ups, and losses write-downs.

n The general rules for creating write-ups/write-downs are defined by the valuation principles outlinedin Customizing.

n From the possible scenarios, the definitions are made in line with legal regulations.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 249: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 54

SAP AG 1999

Valuation principleName of valuation principle

Valuation method 1

Valuation lossValuation gain

101

Valuation loss up to key date value2

2 Valuation gain up to acquisition value

1-step valuation LC basis

Valuation loss0 No valuation loss2 Up to key date value

Valuation gain0 No valuation gain2 Up to acquisition value4 Up to key date value

Disclosedto max.

key date value

DisclosedDisclosedupup to max. to max.

acquisition valueacquisition valueScenario 4

Valuation Principles (One-Step)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 250: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 55

SAP AG 1999

Valuation classValuation class

Val.cl. VC VPr.Fixed 20 101Single 10 101Collect. 20 102Current 21 102

Val.cl. VC VPr.Fixed 20 101Single 10 101Collect. 20 102Current 21 102

Valuation areaValuation area

01 Financial StatementTax balance sheetPortfolio viewBusiness view

01 Financial StatementTax balance sheetPortfolio viewBusiness view

Valuation parametersper company code orsec. account position

Valuation parametersper company code orsec. account position

01 Financial StatementFixed assetsPortfolio valuation

02 Business view Current assets

Portfolio valuation

01 Financial StatementFixed assetsPortfolio valuation

02 Business view Current assets

Portfolio valuation

VPr - Valuation principle001 Valuation method, one-step:dependent on total amount inlocal currency

Valuation loss0 No valuation loss2 Up to key date valueValuation gain0 No valuation gain2 Up to acquisition value4 Up to key date value

002 Valuation method, two-step:split according to security price /exchange rate.......

VC - Valuation category10 Zero bonds: Single analysis - manual allocation11 not supported ! Single analysis - FIFO12 not supported ! Single analysis - LIFO 20 Position management for all sec. accts21 Position management for spec. sec. accts

General Concept: Securities Position Managementand Valuation

n Positions may be valued on any key date. You can also carry out simulation or test runs withoutgenerating postings.

n The valuation class consists of a combination of the valuation principles and valuation methods.

n The valuation area restricts the area for which the valuation is valid. At present, it is planned tosupport various valuation areas here. This will allow you to use several valuation classes for positionvaluation. Currently, only the financial statement is supported.

n The valuation parameters consist of the valuation area and the valuation class. These parameters canbe maintained for the entire company code position (as default values) or for a single securitiesaccount (by defining the position indicator). You can also define in these settings whether you wantto perform valuation at portfolio level.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 251: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 56

SAP AG 1999

Evaluation reports in the Information System

Integration to R/Integration to R/33 F Financialinancial Accounting Accounting

Master dataMaster data

Master dataMaster datal Business partnerl Class master datal Securities account master datal Position indicator

l Exchange ratesl Securities pricesl Others

TransactionTransactionmanagementmanagement

ü Purchases/salesl Exercise rightsl ...

PositionPositionmanagementmanagement

l Valuationl Corporate actionsl Transfer postingsl ...

Securities Management: Overview

n The securities management module enables you to manage securities transactions and positions. Theresulting posting activities are transferred to the Financial Accounting module automatically.

n To use the management processes, you must first create master data. For example, you have to createa security as a class with its relevant structure and condition characteristics, before you can representthe purchase (or sale) of this security in the system.

n In the information system, you have the option of generating evaluations both using master data andtransactions and positions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 252: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 57

SAP AG 1999

Loans Taken

Our model company has long-term financing requirements.We have decided to finance our activities by taking out aloan with our house bank.

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Scenario: Loans Taken

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 253: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 58

SAP AG 1999

LoansManagement

Borrower's note loans

General loans

Policy loans

Mortgage loans

Loans Given - Loans Taken

General loans

Mortgage loans

Loans taken=

Loans received

Loans given=

Loans granted

n The SAP Loans Management module supports various loan forms:

- Mortgage loans:Loans that are linked to a lien upon real property (encumbrance).

- Borrower's note loans:Loans based on a borrower's note.

- Policy loans:Loans related to a policy (such as a life insurance policy).

- General loans:You choose this option for all other forms of loan (for example, loans to employees).

n Loans given: All loan forms are supported

n Loans taken: "Mortgage loans" and "General loans" are supported

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 254: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 59

SAP AG 1999

Integration with R/3 FinancialAccounting / TR Cash Management

Master dataMaster datal Business partnerl Credit standing checkl New business tablesl Filed documentsl Collaterall Object master datal Collateral values

Transaction mgmtTransaction mgmtl Inquiry by interested

partyl Applicationl Offerl Contract

l Rolloverl Process managementl Transfer postingsl . . .

Position mgmtPosition mgmt

Evaluation Reports - Information System

New Loan Transactions: Process Overview

n The Loans Management component takes a process-oriented view. You can manage loans at eachstage and link them to different master data.

n Numerous position management functions are available for loans that have been entered in thesystem.

n The transactions in Loans Management are integrated with the R/3 Financial Accounting and TRCash Management components.

n Several programs are available for running evaluations according to different criteria.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 255: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 60

SAP AG 1999

Evaluation Reports - Information System

Integration with R/3 Financial Accounting / TR Cash Management

ContractContractContract offerContract offerInterested partyInterested party ApplicationApplication ContractContract

• Mortgage loans • Mortgage loans• General loans

• Mortgage loans• General loans

• Mortgage loans• General loans

Possible Procedures for Loan Processing

n There are separate menus for each type of loan. These contain the possible steps in the loan process.

n The process is most complex for mortgage loans.

n All loan forms are integrated with R/3 FI and TR-CM, and can be evaluated according to variouscriteria.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 256: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 61

SAP AG 1999

Loans Given/Taken and Posting

Loans given

Posted to customeraccounts

- Yes- No payment details (PD)- Use of FI payment program

- Yes- PD can be used- Payment program for payment requests can be used

- No

- Yes- PD can be used- Payment program for payment requests can be used

Loans taken

Not posted to customeraccounts

n If a product type is not managed on the basis of customer accounts, you can permit the user to enterpayment details in the transaction by activating the corresponding indicator in the detail screen forthe product type in Customizing. The following functions are then available:

ü Maintenance of payment details for the loan/borrower's note order; possible to let the systemdefault to data from the business partner standing instructions.

ü Update in Cash Management using the house bank and house bank account specified in thepayment details.

ü Use of the replacement rule in account determination for the house bank account that is specifiedin the payment details.

ü Generation of payment requests.

ü Netting with other payments processed using payment requests.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 257: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 62

SAP AG 1999

1. Disbursement: a) "Preliminary posting": Bank clearing to Balance sheet

b) Bank statement: Bank to Bank clearing

2. Debit position: a) "Preliminary posting": Balance sheet to Bank clearingInterest expense

b) Bank statement: Bank clearing to Bank

I. Without customer account

General Posting Options I

n If the loan is not managed on the basis of customer accounts, the postings are made directly to G/Laccounts (I).

n If you do not use customer accounts, the functions for entering payment details are available forpayment processing.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 258: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 63

SAP AG 1999

General Posting Options II

1. Disbursement: a) "Preliminary posting": PR clearing to Balance sheet

b) Payment progr. for PR: Bank clearing to PR clearing

c) Bank statement: Bank to Bank clearing

2. Debit position: a) "Preliminary posting": Balance sheet to PR clearingInterest expense

b1) We pay by direct debit:

Bank statement: PR clearing to Bank clearing

Bank clearing to Bankorb2) We pay by bank transfer:

b) Payment progr. for PR: PR clearing to Bank clearing

Bank statement: Bank clearing to Bank

II. Without customer account, using payment program for payment requests (PR)

n If you do not use customer accounts, the functions for entering payment details are available forpayment processing. In this case, you can either make a "direct" posting (see I), or use a paymentrequest (see II).

n If you use payment requests, the posting logic is the same as for loans managed on the basis ofcustomer accounts, except that the customer account is replaced by a clearing account for paymentrequests. This account can then be cleared by a payment program (SAPF111).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 259: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 64

SAP AG 1999

(Current account) bank statement

Post interest payments/repayments due

Payment program and/or bank statement

Transaction Process: Example

(Application / Offer) / Contract

Contract disbursement

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 260: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 65

SAP AG 1999

Application Transfer to contract

Offer Transfer tocontract

Application Transfer to Transfer to offer contract

or:Decision-making

3

2

1

4Application Transfer to

contract

Createcontract

Transfer to contract

Transfer to contract

Transfer to offerApplication

Offer

Contract - 4 Ways of Entering Contracts in the SAPSystem

n Once you have entered a contract and posted the disbursement, the system creates a correspondingloan position in the balance sheet.

n You can also map the process leading up to conclusion of the legally binding contract, and enterinitial loan data in the form of an application. Further details can be added during the offer phase, orwhen you draw up the final version of the contract.

n The stages through which a loan must (or can) progress (application, offer, contract) depend on yourCustomizing settings.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 261: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 66

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Scenario: Create Contract

Create contract

The legally binding loan contract with our house bankhas been signed.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 262: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 67

SAP AG 1999

ContractContract

ChangeChange

DisburseDisburse

WaiveWaive Full waiver

Partial waiver

DisplayDisplayCreateCreate

ReactivateReactivate

Contract - Function Overview

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 263: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 68

SAP AG 1999

Create Contract: Initial ScreenCreate Contract: Initial Screen

Company codeLoan numberProduct type

0001/internal/33A

F E N T E R

Business partner selectionRole category: Main loan partner

Loan - Initial Screen

n As the borrower, you enter your business partner. You can specify a business partner that has alreadybeen defined in the system or create a new partner.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 264: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 69

SAP AG 1999

Basic dataBasic data ConditionsConditions CollateralCollateral CorrespondenceCorrespondence

l Loan typel Loan class (standard loan, interim loan) ...)l Contract currency (UNI, EUR, USD ...)l Commitment datel Purpose of loan (personal loan, building loan, ...)l Term (term < 1 year ...)

Contract - Basic Data

n Uses of basic data:

- Data for information purposes- Data for reporting evaluations- Values for determining the account assignment reference automatically

n The following short forms help to speed up data entry:

Date entries: 0 : today+n : today + n days-n: today - n days++n: today + n months+++n: today + n years

Amounts: T or t for thousands, M or m for millions(You can rename the abbreviations T/t and M/m in Customizing.)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 265: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 70

SAP AG 1999

Loan contractLoan contractLoan contract

Annuity repmntfrom 05/01/YY4.0%

Condition items

Condition header

Interestfrom 05/01/YY6.0%

Interestfrom 05/01/YY+35.5%

Fixed periodfrom05/01/YY

04/30/YY+3

Fixed periodfrom05/01/YY+3

04/30/YY+6

Chargesfrom 05/01/YYUSD 100

Condition Header / Condition Items

n The combination of the condition header and the condition items provides a high degree of flexibilitywhen you set up the loan conditions.

n The condition header contains date details (such as Fixed until) as well as information relevant for allitems (such as Disbursement rate, Effective interest rate or Effective interest method).

n Each condition item contains information relating to that particular condition type (such as nominalinterest). You assign an effective period to each individual condition. This allows you to represent acondition structure in which the conditions change within the fixed period (example: an interest ratethat changes annually for a fixed period lasting several years).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 266: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 71

SAP AG 1999

Basic dataBasic data ConditionsConditions CollateralCollateral CorrespondenceCorrespondence

l Condition header:

- Commitment capital- Disbursement rate- Repayment type (instalments, annuity, full repayment upon maturity)- Start of term / end of term- Fixed from / fixed to- Effective interest method (PAngV, Braess ...)- ...

Contract - Condition Header

n The condition header contains the basic condition data for the loan, including:

- Start of term / end of term: Term of the loan- Fixed from / fixed to: The period for which the first set of conditions applies. The fixed from / fixed to period can be the same as or shorter than the loan term.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 267: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 72

SAP AG 1999

Basic dataBasic data ConditionsConditions CollateralCollateral CorrespondenceCorrespondence

l Condition items:

For each condition type (fixed nominal interest / instalmentrepayment / charge ...):

- Effective from- Percentage rate or amount- Calculation date- Due date- Exact payment form- ...

Contract - Condition Items

n You enter the individual conditions as condition items.

The calculation date relates to the calculations in financial mathematics. In the case of an interestcondition, for instance, this would be the last interest date for the corresponding interest period.

The due date is the date on which payment is due.

The "exact payment form" (PE - Payment form with adjustment days) is the combination of thepayment form (at the start of the period, mid-period, at the end of the period) and the frequency inmonths (monthly, quarterly, six-monthly ...). It tells you exactly up to when the amounts have beencalculated and when they are due.

n You can enter all the data for the condition items manually, or enter certain "initial values" and letthe system fill the remaining fields. To use the latter option, you must specify the commitmentcapital, the effective period for the condition, the percentage rate or amount, and the exact paymentform (or payment form and frequency).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 268: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 73

SAP AG 1999

Condition Items - Fields

Condition items

Cond.type text

Nominal int.

Inst. repaymnt

Eff.from Percent Amnt Curr. Lvl IS PF PE Frq Due on ED Calc.date MC CR05/01/YY 6.0000 UNI 3 VN 3 06/30/YY 06/30/YY

305/01/YY 2,000 UNI VN 3 06/30/YY 06/30/YY

... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ...

n Explanation of field names:

Lvl: Level number of condition items for recurring condition types

IS: Immediate settlement

PF: Payment form (at start of period, mid-period, at end of period)

Frq: Number of months in period

PE: Payment form - exact day (with adjustment days)

ED: End-of-month indicator for due date

MC: End-of-month indicator for calculation date

CR: Calendar rule. You can use the calendar rule to shift a public holiday, Saturday or Sunday to aworking day. This is not usually applied to the calculation date (the interest calculation does notdepend on whether the day is a working day), but is relevant for the due date (payments canonly be made on a working day). Example: Due date 01/01/YY (relevant for calculating thecapital amounts) is shifted using the calendar rule to the next working day 01/03/YY, andreferred to as the payment date (relevant for processing in accounting).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 269: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 74

SAP AG 1999

Basic loan dataBasic loan data

Condition header

Cash flowCash flow

Condition items

Planned records

------------------------------------------------------

Condition Structure

n The condition structure in Loans Management is based on the central condition concept.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 270: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 75

SAP AG 1999

Calculate cash flowCalculate cash flow

Basic dataBasic data ConditionsConditions CollateralCollateral ObjectsObjects Correspon-dence

Correspon-dence

Loans - Cash Flow

Due on

05/01/YY06/30/YY06/30/YY09/30/YY09/30/YY12/31/YY12/31/YY03/31/YY+103/31/YY+106/30/YY+106/30/YY+109/30/YY+109/30/YY+112/31/YY+112/31/YY+103/31/YY+203/31/YY+2

Settlement amnt100,000.00

1,166.671,333.331,726.672,000.001,691.672,000.001,656.672,000.001,621.672,000.001,551.672,000.001,516.67

2,000.001,481.672,000.00

Curr.UNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNI

Bezeichnung P

SPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

FType10011110112011101120111011201110112011101120111011201110112011101120

L_Loan disbursem.L_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payable

n On the basis of the conditions belonging to a financial transaction and the specified calculationperiod, the function modules for financial mathematics for the relevant application (such as stockpurchase, swap, loan contract) calculate a series of payment flows for the transaction. This series offlows is referred to as the cash flow.

n The cash flow for financial transactions is used as the basis for all trading, transaction managementand position management processes, as well as for the evaluation activities within Treasury.Processes based on the cash flow include:- Effective interest calculation- Posting- Accrual and deferral of expenses and revenues

n The cash flow display is linked to the ABAP List Viewer.

n Flow types explain the different changes to the cash flows. Together, all the flows of a transactionform the basis for generating the cash flow, and for further processing, such as posting. The cashflow contains all the flow records in chronological order and is used as a basis for updating thetransaction data in Financial Accounting, Cash Management, and Market Risk Management.Typical flow types are fixed or floating interest, increases in nominal amounts, or commission.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 271: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 76

SAP AG 1999

IDES AG

AIBD/ISMA Braeß Moosm. PAngV

Scaling period 05/01/YY to 04/30/YY+5Contract no.: 10000000

Effective rate: 7.79600

Page 1

% PANGV

Value date

05/01/YY06/30/YY06/30/YY09/30/YY09/30/YY12/31/YY12/31/YY03/31/YY+103/31/YY+105/01/YY+106/30/YY+106/30/YY+1

Activity

L_DisbursementL_Instalment repmtL_Interest payableL_Instalment repmtL_Interest payableL_Instalment repmtL_Interest payableL_Instalment repmtL_Interest payableInterest capitalizationL_Instalment repmtL_Interest payable

Amount

100,000.00 1,333.33-1,166.67-2,000.00-1,726.67-2,000.00-1,691.67-2,000.00-1,656.67-6,777.93 2,000.00-1,621.67-

Balance

100,000.0098,666.6797,500.0095,500.0093,773.3391,773.3390,081.6688,081.6686,424.9993,202.9291,202.9289,581.25

Days

59

90

91

90

3059

90

Interest

1,179.34

1,754.03

1,705.73

1,620.57

518.261,099.18

1,611.57

Effective Interest Calculation

n The system uses both planned and actual records to calculate the yield. The key flow information isderived from the condition items.A special feature in Loans Management is that the yield is calculated on the basis of the cash flow.This avoids the disadvantages of a conventional solution with mathematical formulas. It also allowsyou to include any of the various price components or flows (for example, insurance premiums) inthe yield calculation. You can switch between different yield calculation methods and compare theresults.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 272: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 77

SAP AG 1999

PAYMENT SCHEDULE Loan no. 10000000 05/01/YY

Mortgage loanUNI 150,000.00Universal currency

Loan type:Commitment capital:Display currency:

Conditions

L_Nominal int.

L_Instalm. rep.

Pmnt date

05/01/YY06/30/YY09/30/YY12/31/YY03/31/YY+1

Eff. from

05/01/YY

05/01/YY

Payment

2,500.003,726.673,691.673,656.67

Percent

7.00000 %

Interest

1,166.671,726.671,691.671,656.67

Amount

2,000.00

Frequency

Quarterly

Quarterly

Repayment

1,333.332,000.002,000.002,000.00

Calculation from:Calculation to:Start of term:End of term:Fixed period end:

05/01/YY04/30/YY+505/01/YY04/30/YY+1004/30/YY+5

First

06/30/YY

06/30/YY

Other

IntCalcMth

360/360

360/360 Imm. settlem.

100,000.00 98,666.68 96,666.6794,666.6792,666.67

Remaining bal.

Payment Schedule

n The system generates a payment schedule on the basis of the planned records in the cash flow. Thepayment schedule contains general loan data as well as the individual condition items. It lists all thepayments for the fixed period, divided into interest payments and repayments, with thecorresponding outstanding balance.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 273: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 78

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Create Contract

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 274: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 79

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Scenario: Disbursement

Disbursement received

Our house bank will credit the loan amount to ourcurrent account.We want to post the expected incoming payment inadvance.The bank statement will tell us when the loan amount isactually credited.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 275: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 80

SAP AG 1999

Create Disbursement: Basic DataCreate Disbursement: Basic Data

Disbursement basic data

CoCdLoan

Flow typeTextPayment dateIntValDateWithhold. up toPosting control

House bankAccount ID

L_Loan disbursement receivable

Capital dataCurrent contr. cap.Nominal capitalDisbursement in %Gross pmnt amountNet pmnt amount

Disbursement rate

General loanLoan partner 00

000140000000

33B

1001

05/01/YY05/01/YY05/01/YY

100,000.00 UNI 0.00 100.0000 100,000.00 UNI

100.00000

99,900.00

Automatic debit position

Incl.

Contract: Disbursement

DBGIRUN

n The entries for the disbursement have the following effects:- Payment date: Disbursement date that is transferred to FI and Cash Management- Interest value date inclusive/exclusive: Interest for the disbursement amount is calculated forthe

disbursement date / is not calculated for the disbursement date- House bank: The system defaults to the house bank defined in the standing instructions(payment

details).- Disbursement in %: Full disbursement or partial disbursement- Net/Gross payment amount: If you have partial disbursements with incidental costs, you must

decide whether the incidental costs reduce the disbursement amount (net) or increase thedisbursement amount counted towards the calculation capital (gross). (Gross: value-datedamount; net: payment flow)

Example: Capital 100,000 UNI. First partial disbursement 40%. Incidental costs 2,000 UNI.Case 1: Gross pmnt amount 40,000 --> net pmnt amount 38,000,or Case 2: Gross pmnt amount 42,000 --> net pmnt amount 40,000.Last partial disbursement 60%, no incidental costs: Gross/net Case 1: 60,000; Case 2: 58,000.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 276: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 81

SAP AG 1999

Disburse Contract: Incidental Costs

Create Disbursement: Incidental CostsCreate Disbursement: Incidental Costs

Capital amountsAvailable capital Value-dated capital

Flows

Flow Name

Company codeLoan

0001 33B40000000

Due on WithheldSettlementamount

Pmtmeth.

100,000.00 100,000.00

6145 05/01/YY 100.00 X Processing charges

......

n If you want to make charges for (one-time) incidental costs, you must enter these charges here. Youdefine which flow types are permitted in Customizing.The incidental costs you enter here can be withheld from the disbursement amount (flag: W/H).Alternatively, you can post the incidental costs separately (W/H flag not set). If you want to triggerthe payment yourself later on, you must enter a payment method for processing with the paymentprogram.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 277: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 82

SAP AG 1999

Save / Post Disbursement

Disbursement

Save Post (manually)

P

Manual posting Automatic posting

"Automatic debit position"or"Manual debit position"

"Automatic debit position"

I I

I

Prerequisite: Field "Posting control":

Prerequisite: Field "Posting control":

n You can either post the disbursement immediately (I = actual record), or save it first (P = plannedrecord) and post it later.

n The planned record for a disbursement you have saved can be posted in two ways: By calling up thedisbursement data for the loan, you can post the individual record manually. Alternatively, you canlet the system post the flow automatically with the mass processing function Post Planned Records.The entry you make in the Posting control field for the disbursement determines the type of postingpermitted - manual posting only, or both manual and automatic posting.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 278: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 83

SAP AG 1999

Selection of financialtransactions/flows to beposted

Loan contract: Cash flowLoan contract: Cash flow05/01//YY 150,000.00 Loan disbursement 1001 06/30/YY 1,720.83 Interest payable 1110 06/30/YY 639.05 Annuity rep. payable 1125

05/01//YY 150,000.00 Loan disbursement 1001 06/30/YY 1,720.83 Interest payable 1110 06/30/YY 639.05 Annuity rep. payable 1125

FI interface

Financial Accounting

Integration with FI

n When you post the disbursement, the system calls up the interface to Financial Accounting. Beforethe disbursement posting, no loan data is transferred to FI.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 279: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 84

SAP AG 1999

Balance sheet account46020

Bank clearing account113105

1) 100,000 100 2)

Other expenses204000

2) 100

1) 100,000

4) 99,900

Technical clearing acct194200

100 3)4) 100

1) Loan disbursement2) Credit position incidental costs3) Incidental costs withheld: Outgoing payment4) Incidental costs withheld: Reduction of disbursement (only posted in FI)

Disburse Contract: Posting

3) 100 100,000 4)

n Example: Disbursement of a loan with incidental costs

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 280: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 85

SAP AG 1999

Cash flow in contract

Post disbursement

Cash flow in contract

Payment date Settlement amnt Name P FType

05/01/YY 100,000.00 Loan disbursem. P 1001

Payment date Settlement amnt Name P FType

05/01/YY 100,000.00 Loan disbursem. I 1001

'Plannedrecord'

'Actualrecord'

Planned -> Actual Record

n Flows that have been entered, but not yet posted, are displayed in the cash flow as P - plannedrecords. Posted flows are displayed as I - actual records.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 281: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 86

SAP AG 1999

Liquidity forecast / cash position

05/01/YY 146,500.00

L o a n d i s b u r s e m e n t

TR-CM interface FI interface

Disbursement postedDisbursement savedDisbursement posted

Integration with R/3 Financial Accounting / TRCash Management

Financial Accounting

n When you save a disbursement, the system generates planned records and writes them to thedatabase. These records can already be used as a basis for the integration with Cash Management.

n If you post the disbursement immediately, the records are also integrated with Financial Accounting.You can then display the corresponding FI document.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 282: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 87

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Disburse Contract

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 283: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 88

SAP AG 1999

Payment Options

Payment received from lender

By bank transferor

By check

Bank statement

BANK FileNote to payee

~~~~~~~~~~

BANK

Automatic bank statement Manual bank statement/

n If the lender pays by bank transfer, we receive the money and the bank statement from our housebank with the corresponding information.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 284: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 89

SAP AG 1999

Bankstatement

Manualentry

Interimdataset

G/L accountingdocuments

Postdirectly

Incoming Bank Transfer: Example of Manual BankStatement

n Once the payment appears in the bank statement, the flows for the corresponding account areupdated in the system. On the basis of the data entered, the system generates an interim dataset,which then has to be posted. The flows can either be posted directly, or at a later stage using batchinput.

The postings always affect the general ledger (bank account and bank clearing account).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 285: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 90

SAP AG 1999

Disbursement Payment (Bank Transfer): Posting

5) Bank statement

99,900 5)

Bank account113100

Balance sheet account46020

Bank clearing account113105

1) 100,000 100,000 4)

Other expenses204000

2) 100

1) 100,000

4) 99,900

Technical clearing acct194200

100 3)4) 100

5) 99,900

3) 100 100 2)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 286: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 91

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Scenario: Payments Due

Payments due

We want to make the repayments and pay the interest on theagreed due date.The corresponding amounts must be posted as due.

We have arranged to make the payment to the borrower bybank transfer.This payment needs to be triggered in the system.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 287: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 92

SAP AG 1999

Automatic Posting: Post Planned Records

?

toto

toto

000140000000

Company codeContract numberPartnerProduct type

Upto and incl. due date

x Test run x Log

40 46020 UNIOther loans

1,333.33 D

40 UNIInterest expenses220000 1,166.67 D

50 113105Bank clearing account

UNI 2,500.00 C

Selection of planned records

Posting control

n The future flows that have been calculated for a loan must be posted as "due" on the respective dates.The Post Planned Records function allows you to generate the postings in a mass processing run. Forthe loans you have selected, it posts all the planned records that have a due date less than or equal tothe value entered in the field Upto and including due date.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 288: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 93

SAP AG 1999

6) Post planned records: Post (interest and repayment) amounts due ( P--->I)

Post Planned Records Due

99,900 5)

Bank account113100

Balance sheet account46020

Bank clearing account113105

1) 100,000 100,000 4)

Other expenses204000

2) 100

1) 100,000

4) 99,900

Technical clearing acct194200

100 3)4) 100

5) 99,900

6) 1,333

Interest expenses220000

6) 1,167

1,333 6) 1,167 6)

100 2) 3) 100

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 289: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 94

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Post Amounts as "Due"

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 290: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 95

SAP AG 1999

Outgoing payment to lender

Payment Options

Bank statement Payment program forpayment requests

Bank statement

By bank transferorBy check

By direct debit

n The processing steps for paying the amounts due depend on the payment option we choose:

If we opt for direct debit, the lender debits the money from our account, and we receive the debitinformation with the bank statement from our house bank.

If we pay by check or bank transfer, we trigger the payment using the payment run for paymentrequests. The money is transferred using the payment media generated by the payment program. Thebank statement then informs us of the outgoing payment.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 291: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 96

SAP AG 1999

7) Outgoing payment for the due amounts, for example by direct debit

2,500 7)

Outgoing Payments

Bank account113100

Balance sheet account46020

1) 100,000

Other expenses204000

2) 100

Technical clearing acct194200

100 3)4) 100

6) 99,900

6) 1,333

Interest expenses220000

6) 1,167

99,900 5)

Bank clearing account113105

100 2)1) 100,000

4) 99,9001,333 6) 1,167 6)

7) 2,500

3) 100100,000 4)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 292: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 97

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term:Closing Operations / Special Cases

Closing operations / special cases

To carry out the month-end closing activities, we want togain an overview of the procedure for accrual/deferral andvaluation.

We also want to know how to treat special cases.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 293: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 98

SAP AG 1999

Closing Operations / Special Cases

Special cases:

- Change cash flow

- Business operations

- Transfer postings

- Release

Closing operations:

- Accrual/deferral (interest, premium/discount)

- (Foreign currency) valuation

- Information system

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 294: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 99

SAP AG 1999

Accrual/Deferral: Overview

Accrual/deferral:- Reset procedure (for interest and similar flows, for discount)- Difference procedure (for discount)

Reverse accrual/deferral

Reset accrual/deferral(for reset procedure)

n To assign receipts and outgoings to the correct accounting period, you carry out accruals/deferrals.

n The accrual/deferral procedure determines how the expense and revenue accounts are updated.The accrual/deferral run is based on the flows up to the accrual/deferral key date for the transactionactivities you have selected. For each flow that is relevant for accrual/deferral, the system calculatesthe accrual/deferral amount and generates corresponding accrual/deferral flows.You can carry out the accrual/deferral run as a test run (accrual/deferral log), or as an update run thatmakes the actual accrual/deferral postings (accrual/deferral log and posting log).

n If you are using the reset procedure, you reset the accrual/deferral by choosing ResetAccrual/Deferral.

n You can use the Reverse Accrual/Deferral function to reverse posted accruals/deferrals andthe reset postings. If both accrual/deferral and reset postings have been made, you must firstreverse the reset posting before you can reverse the accrual/deferral posting.If you want to reverse several discount deferrals, you work backwards in chronological order.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 295: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 100

SAP AG 1999

Valuation: Position Valuation

Maintain exchange ratel Valuation logl Posting log

Foreign currencyloansPosition valuation

n When you produce your financial statements at the end of the month or year, you must value anyforeign currency loans. You can value loan positions at any key date. This key date valuation usesthe exchange rate for the key date to value the positions for accounting purposes.

n You define the valuation parameters in Customizing.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 296: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 101

SAP AG 1999

Calculate cash flowCalculate cash flow

Basic dataBasic data ConditionsConditions CollateralCollateral ObjectsObjects Correspon-dence

Correspon-dence

Loans - Cash Flow

Due on

05/01/YY06/30/YY06/30/YY09/30/YY09/30/YY12/31/YY12/31/YY03/31/YY+103/31/YY+106/30/YY+106/30/YY+109/30/YY+109/30/YY+112/31/YY+112/31/YY+103/31/YY+203/31/YY+2

Settlement amnt100,000.00

1,166.671,333.331,726.672,000.001,691.672,000.001,656.672,000.001,621.672,000.001,551.672,000.001,516.67

2,000.001,481.672,000.00

Curr.UNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNI

Name P

SPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

FType10011110112011101120111011201110112011101120111011201110112011101120

L_Loan disbursem.L_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payable

n Flow types explain the different changes to the cash flows. Together, all the flows of a transactionform the basis for generating the cash flow, and for further processing, such as posting. The cashflow contains all the flow records in chronological order and is used as a basis for updating thetransaction data in Financial Accounting, Cash Management, and Market Risk Management.Typical flow types are fixed or floating interest, or commission.

n The cash flow display is linked to the ABAP List Viewer.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 297: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 102

SAP AG 1999

Contract --> Change --> Cash flow --> Select flow record --> Extras--> Change flow

Manual changes to flows in the cash flow

12/31/YY 12/31/YY 5,000.00 1120 L_Instalm. rep.

Due date Payment date Amount Flow type Text

Icon for change

Icon for fixing

Cash Flow: Making Changes

n In some cases, it is useful to be able to make changes to the planned records quickly and simply,especially for loans taken.

n Prerequisite:The conditions must be changeable. This is the case when a disbursement has beenposted (full or partial disbursement), and not just saved.

n Flows that can be changed:- Only condition-based flows- Only planned flows for the current fixed period

n Data that can be changed:- Due date- Payment date- Settlement date for alternative settlement- Amount- Payment data (partner, partner bank type, payment method, dunning area, dunning block)

n You can change flows manually. If you want the system to take these changes into account when thecash flow is recalculated, you must fix the changes.A calendar icon appears if you fix the due date/payment date.A lock icon appears if you fix the data for the whole flow.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 298: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 103

SAP AG 1999

Calculate cash flowCalculate cash flow Basic view

Due date view

Calculation view

Posting view

View for manual changes

......

Loans - Cash Flow: Display Variants

Due on

05/01/YY06/30/YY06/30/YY09/30/YY09/30/YY12/31/YY12/31/YY03/31/YY+103/31/YY+106/30/YY+106/30/YY+109/30/YY+109/30/YY+112/31/YY+112/31/YY+103/31/YY+203/31/YY+2

Settlement amnt100,000.00

1,166.671,333.331,726.672,000.001,691.675,000.001,656.672,000.001,621.672,000.001,551.672,000.001,516.67

2,000.001,481.672,000.00

Curr.UNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNIUNI

Name P

SPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

FType10011110112011101120111011201110112011101120111011201110112011101120

L_Loan disbursem.L_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payableL_Interest payableL_Inst. rep. payable

n The cash flow display is linked to the ABAP List Viewer.You can use the display variants to focus on different information. For example, one of thepredefined display variants gives you the data for manual changes.

n The cash flow is regenerated on the basis of the fixed changes. Should the changes result in newannuity or instalment amounts, or a reduction in the term, these flows must be calculated separatelyto take effect.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 299: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 104

SAP AG 1999

What is a business operation (BO)?

l An activity relating to a loan, which generates one or severalflow records (unscheduled repayment, charge).

l These flows are not posted using the automatic debit positionfunction. Instead, the posting must be triggered specifically forthis activity.

Business Operations for a Contract

n A business operation (BO) can pass through three statuses. It is first entered, then activated, and thenposted.- Entered business operations are included as simulated records in the (simulated) cash flow

calculation (within BO processing). If you delete the business operation, you cannot trace thehistory.

- Activated business operations contain fixed flows that can no longer be changed. These flowsare

saved to the database as planned records. If you delete an active business operation, you canstill

trace the history.- Posted business operations cannot be deleted. They have to be reversed.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 300: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 105

SAP AG 1999

Types of Business Operation

Enter Charges Individually

- Entry of one or several business operations- Each business operation consists of one flow record

Enter Charges as Business Operation Unscheduled Repayment

- Entry of one or several business operations- Each business operation can consist of several flow records

n Each of the above functions allows you to enter one or several business operations.You use the functions Enter Charges as Business Operation and Unscheduled Repayment to enterone or several more complex business operations, which can also involve derived flows (such as rategains or accrual/deferral flows) or incidental costs.

n You post the flows generated by a business operation using the business operation function.Flows entered using the function Enter Charges Individually can also be posted using the PostIndividual Records function.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 301: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 106

SAP AG 1999

Enter Charges as Business Operation: Example

CoCdLoan

BO status Name First entered by First entered on

Entered Special charge Assistant, Mark MM/DD/YYYY Activated Posting charge Assistant, Mark MM/DD/YYYY

Flows for business operation

Activate Post Create Details

FTyp Amount Curr. Pmnt date Name Pmnt transact. PC 6145 100 UNI MM/DD/YY Special charge x 21 6146 50 UNI MM/DD/YY Extra charge x 21 6147 10 UNI MM/DD/YY Process. charge x 21

100000060001

n The overview contains all the business operations of this BO type for the contract that have not yetbeen posted.

n You define the flows the user is permitted to enter for each business operation in Customizing.

n The system automatically enters the value "21" (manual debit position) in the Posting control field.The setting for the Payment transaction indicator depends on the Customizing settings.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 302: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 107

SAP AG 1999

Position: Account 2

Position: Account 1

Capital position 1

Capital position 2

Capital position n

Capital position x

Capital position 1

Capital position a

Capital position b

Capital position y

Transfer Postings: Overview

Balance sheet transferBalance sheet transfer

Capital transfer:Capital transfer:Group contractsGroup contracts

Capital transfer:Capital transfer:Split contractSplit contract

n You can use the Balance Sheet Transfer function to transfer loan positions relating to a contractbetween different G/L accounts in Financial Accounting. In this case, the transfer only affects the FIgeneral ledger.

n The Capital Transfer functions allow you to transfer positions between different contracts.This affects both the loans subledger and the FI general ledger.

Grouping contracts usually involves transferring capital amounts from several contracts to one targetcontract. Splitting a contract usually involves transferring the capital amounts from one contract toseveral contracts.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 303: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 108

SAP AG 1999

Data Further processing

- Loan master data- Business partners- Objects- Business operations- Capital transfers- Reversals- Disbursements

Loans: Release

Release

n The release reports have been replaced by the release workflow:

Step-by-step release procedure according to the multiple control principle for the main functionsaffecting master data and flow data.

n Release objects:1. Flow data: Business operations*, capital transfers, reversals, disbursements2. Central master data: Loan master data, business partners, objects*(3 release objects: Enter charges individually, enter charges as business operation, unscheduledrepayment)

n Generic workflow functions:- Define maximum time period for work items: Pick up task, processing, throughput- Create attachments- Forward- ResubmissionUser-specific adjustments to the workflow, for example:- Throughput times- Set up agent control to direct the work items to the correct agents (users) - find user on the basis

of the release object, company code, release level, and product type (also refer to thedocumentation in the SAP Library under BC-Basis -> SAP Business Workflow).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 304: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 109

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Unit Summary (1)

l Securities Managementn Overview of evaluation options

n Transaction management process:- Buying / selling- Posting incoming revenues

n Master data:Classes, securities accounts, positionindicators

n Position management process:Valuation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 305: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 110

SAP AG 1999

Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm: Unit Summary (2)

l Loans Managementn Overview of loan forms

n Transaction management process:- Create contract- Process disbursement received- Integration with CM and FI

n Position management process:- Post payments as due- Make payments due

n Closing operations / special cases

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 306: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 111

Data used in the Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium andLong TermExplanation of the symbols in the exercises and solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Unit objectives

Business scenario

Tips & tricks

Warning and caution

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 307: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 112

Data used in the exercisesData Data in the training

systemData in the IDES system

Company codes TR00 to TR20 1000

ID numbers 555700 to 555720716463519000270144113495113501

1002

1000

Securities accounts DEUBA ACC1DEUBA ACC2

1000

Issuer DEUBAWEST LB

1000

Depository bank DEUBA 1000

Counterparty DEUBA 1000

Lender DEUBA 1000

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 308: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 113

Financial Transactions in the medium and long term Exercises

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Concluding securities transactions.Integrating transaction management into Cash Management

Due to changes in the level of interest rates on the capital market, youwant to reduce your stock portfolio. You place an order with your housebank to sell 3000 units of Telekom stocks. The bank later notifies youthat the sale has been executed at 92 UNI (value date: 2 days later).

1-1 Check the position on your two securities accounts (DEUBA ACC1 and DEUBAACC2). To do this, call up the position overview and enter the following selectioncriteria in the report:

- Company code: TRxx- Key date: Current date- Key date reference: Position value date

Choose the object list as the output type.

Make a note of the number of units and the securities account of the Telekom stock.

_____________ _____________________ _______________Securities account ID number No. units

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 309: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 114

1-2 Make a part-sale of 3,000 units of your Telekom stocks.

1-2-1 To do this, create an order. Your partner is the DEUBA.1-2-2 Execute this at 92 UNI.1-2-3 Settle the transaction.1-2-4 Post the transaction.

As you do this, check the impact on the cash flow and on Cash Management for eachactivity category!

You can only display the cash flow after you haveexecuted the order/contract.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 310: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 115

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Creating class master data

You invest the money you receive from the sale of your stocks in bonds.A bond issued by the West LB offers you very favorable conditions. Torepresent the purchase of this new security, you must first enter the classmaster data.

2-1 Create the Westdeutsche Landesbank bond as a class.

Enter the following transaction data:• ID number: 213 2XX• Nominal value: 1000• Nominal trading unit: 1000• Issue currency: UNI• Term: 10/21/98 – 10/20/2008• Issue rate: 100• Maturity• Annual interest payment: 5.25%• Exchange: Frankfurt/Main

Look at the cash flow.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 311: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 116

2-2 Securities purchaseFor your securities account DEUBA ACC1, purchase this bond for a nominal value of200,000 UNI (value date: 2 days later).

2-2-1 To do this, create an order2-2-2 Execute it at 105 %.2-2-3 Then settle it using the collective processing function.2-2-4 Post the transaction.

Ignore the warning when you create the order.Let the position indicator be created automatically when you executethe order.

For each activity category, look at both the cash flow and the effects on the bank orclearing bank accounts in Cash Management (cash position).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 312: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 117

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Defining organizational elements: Portfolios and securities accounts

As a result of favorable conditions at our house bank, we open anothersecurities account.

3-1 Your company opens a new securities account at the Deutsche Bank. This securitiesaccount serves as clearing account no. 444556XX for processing the payments resultingfrom securities transactions.

Create the securities account in the system:

• Securities account: DEUBA Acc4• Securities account no.: 22224446• Securities account name: DEUBA Securities Account 4• Depository bank: DEUBA• House bank: DB• House bank account: GIRUN• Portfolio 1

3-2 Create the position indicator for the new bond for your new securities account.• Valuation class: SEC FA• Account assignment reference: 42000000

3-3 Conclude a securities transaction (bond) for your new securities account.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 313: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 118

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Creating a loan contract

We want to finance various long-term investments by taking out a loanwith our house bank.

4 Create a loan granted by our house bank DEUBA.

Contract data:

• Loan purpose: choose one of the alternatives• Maturity: 10 years• Repayment: in installments• Commitment capital: 50,000 UNI• Disbursement rate: 100 %• Interest calculation method: 360E/360

Nominal interest:

• Exact payment form: (PE): every six months, at the end of the period (HN)(Payment form: at end of period; frequency: 06)

• 4 % fixed

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 314: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 119

Repayment:

• Exact payment form: (PE): every six months, at the end of the period• Immediate repayment settlement• You want the system to calculate the repayment instalment.

Execute the calculation for these values.

Administration charge: 250 UNI to be paid annually at the end of each yearCheck your condition entries by looking at the cash flow.

Once you have entered all the condition data, let the system calculate the effectiveinterest rate.Have the effective interest rate calculated according to PAngV.

Save your loan and make a note of the loan number.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 315: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 120

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Posting the disbursement amount

Our house bank has credited the loan amount to our current account. Wewant to post the expected incoming payment.

5-1 Enter the disbursement you are going to receive. The bank charges 100 UNI forprocessing the disbursement (one-time fee). This charge will be withheld from thedisbursement amount.

Post the disbursement, and check the disbursement log.

5-2 What changes can you see in the cash flow after posting the disbursement?

5-3 Check how the loan data is integrated in Cash Management. To do this, call up theliquidity forecast in Cash Management. Use the grouping GESAMT "Total display".

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 316: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 121

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Posting interest and repayment amounts as due

We want to make the interest payments and repayments on the due dateagreed with the lender. To do this, we must post the amounts as due in thesystem.

6-1 Call up the Post Planned Records function. Restrict the selection to your loan contractin your company code. In the Upto and including due date field, enter the date up towhich the planned records should be posted as due.

Check the posting log.

6-2 What changes can you see in the cash flow after the next interest payment andrepayment items have been posted as due?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 317: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 122

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term Solutions

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Entering a transaction

• Integration with Cash Management

1-1 To check the positions:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Information System→ Position/Position Trend→ Position Overview

Select the “Object list” output type

1-2 Solution for entering your transaction

1-2-1 To create an order:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Trading→ Transaction→ Create

Create the transaction as an order.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 318: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 123

Cash flow: Only exists after the order has been executed.

Cash Management:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Cash Management→ Information System→ Reports for Cash Management→ Liquidity Analyses→ Liquidity Forecast

Field name or data type Value

Grouping GESAMT (Total display)

Display as of one day before value date

Display in UNI

Select the delta display

You see: No change when you create an order.

1-2-2 To execute an order/contract:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Trading→ Transaction→ Execute

Field name or data type Value

Position value date Today plus 2 days

Payment date Today plus 2 days

Cash flow:

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 319: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 124

You see the amounts for the outflow and the price gains/losses asplanned records (P).

Cash Management: see above.

You see the stock sale:

Summarization: DeutscheAccount: DBGIROLevel: Securities

1-2-3 To settle the transaction:

→ Back Office→ Transaction→ Settle

Cash flow:

Sales amount as actual record (I);Price gains/losses still shown as a planned record (P).

Cash Management: see above.

No change of level

1-2-4 To post the transaction:

→ Accounting→ Transaction→ Post

Cash Management: see above.

You see:

Summarization: Bank account historyAccounts: DBZWIUNILevel: Int. post

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 320: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 125

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Creating class master data

2-1 Create class

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Master Data→ Class

Field name or data type Value

ID number 2132xx

Product type 04I

To call up the details for the conditions, double-click one of the entryfields in the conditions section.

Cash flow:

When you create class data, the system simulates calculating thecash flow automatically using a hypothetical value of 100,000 UNI.

2-2 Solution for entering your transaction

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 321: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 126

2-2-1 To create an order:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Trading→ Transaction→ Create

Ignore the warning message “Securities account position indicatornot yet created” by pressing ‘enter’.

Cash flow: only exists in trading after the order has been executed.

2-2-2 To execute the order/contract

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Trading→ Transaction→ Execute

Field name or data type Value

Price 105

Position value date Today plus 2 days

Calculation date: Today plus 1 day

Payment date Today plus 2 days

Cash flow:(You see the amounts for the inflow and the price gains/losses as plannedrecords (P)).

Cash Management: see above.

You see the bond purchase:

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 322: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 127

Summarization: DeutscheAccount: DBGIROLevel: Securities

2-2-3 To settle the transaction:

→ Back Office→ Transaction→ Settle

Cash flow:

You see: Purchase amount as actual record (I);Price gains/losses still shown as a planned record (P).

Cash Management: see above.

No change of level

2-2-4 To post the transaction:

→ Accounting→Transaction→ Post

Cash Management: see above.

You see:

Summarization: Bank account historyAccounts: DBZWIUNILevel: Int. post

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 323: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 128

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Defining organizational elements: Portfolios and securities accounts

3-1 To create a securities account:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Securities→ Master Data→ Securities Account→ Create

3-2 To create a position indicator:

→ Master Data→ Position Indicator→ Securities Account Position Indicator→ Create

3-3 Security purchase

See previous solutions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 324: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 129

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

• Creating a loan contract

4 To create a contract:

→ Accounting→Treasury→ Loans→ Transaction Management→ General Loan→ Contract→ Create

Field name or data type ValueCompany code TRXX

Loan number Assigned by the system

Product type 33B

Field name or data type Value

Partner DeubaRole type A102

Basic data: Data

Conditions:

Field name or data type Value

Percent 4

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 325: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 130

PE HN

- Set the IS indicator to active in order to have the repaymentssettled immediately.

- To add the administration charge, choose the button Insertadditional items.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 326: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 131

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

5-1 To disburse a loan contract:

→ Loans→ Transaction Management→ General Loan→ Contract→ Disburse

Entries: DataButton: Incidental costs; data entry (withheld!)

Post

5-2 To look at the changes in the cash flow:

→ Loans→ Portfolio→ Contract→ Display(Alternative: Loans -> Transaction Management -> General Loan -> Contract ->Display)

Button: Cash flow

The disbursement and the processing charges appear as actual records in the cash flowof the transaction.

5-3 To see how the loans area is integrated with Cash Management:

→ Treasury→ Cash Management→ Information System→ Reports for Cash Management→ Liquidity Analyses→ Liquidity Forecast (or Cash Position)

Entries:Grouping: GESAMT "Total display" (or BANKEN "Bank account history")Display currency: UNI

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 327: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 132

Note: Choose "Level B5 - Int. posts" (other interim postings).Group/Account: DBZWIBU

When you disburse the contract, the disbursement amount appears in CashManagement.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 328: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 133

Unit: Financial Transactions in the Medium and LongTerm

6-1 To post planned records automatically:

→ Loans→ Accounting→ Execute Posting: Mass Processing→ Post Planned Records

Entries:Company codeContract number"Upto and including due date"Posting date

6-2 Changes in the cash flow:

The cash flow now includes the posted interest and repayment flows as actual records.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 329: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 1

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions

Contents:

l Derivative Instrumentsl Market Risk Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 330: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 2

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Describe the main functions of Market RiskManagement

l Use the MRM functions for analyzing interest andcurrency risks

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 331: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 3

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

SAP Treasury Overview

Liquidity Management in theShort and Medium Term

Introduction

Financial Transactions in the Medium and Long Term

Market Risk Management and ManagingMarket Risk Management and Managing Risk PositionsRisk Positions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 332: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 4

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Business Scenario

Market Risk Managementl Risks arise from your operational transactions as well as

from your financial transactions. They are the result ofchanges to the market parameters, for example, frominterest and exchange rates.The Market Risk Management function enables you toanalyze interest and currency risks and identify suitablehedge transactions in order to hedge against open items.

l You can use mark-to-market valuation to determine the fairmarket prices of your transactions. You can also simulatepotential changes in value to your positions which can resultfrom changes to market data.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 333: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 5

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Analysis and Simulation

In addition to using actual market data forvaluation, you would like to analyze the effectsthat possible changes to the market might have.Using scenarios you depict the most variedtrends ("best case" or "worst case" scenarios)and integrate these into your evaluations.

You use fictitious transactions to identifysuitable instruments to hedge your positionsbefore the transaction is actually concluded.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 334: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 6

SAP AG 1999

Risk

Otherrisks

Liquidity riskCredit riskMarket risk

Exchange raterisk

Interest raterisk

Volatilityrisk ...

Risk Categories

n Market risks are a small subset of the various risk categories an enterprise has to contend with.

n Market risk can be broken down further based on the various sources of risk: interest rate risk,exchange rate risk, price risk and index risk, spread risk, and basic risk.

n Credit risks include creditor risk and country risk.

n Other risks covers all internal risks, such as organizational risk or legal risk.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 335: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 7

SAP AG 1999

Risk Controlling in Treasury

RiskControlling

Limitchecking

Specificationof measuring

methods

Monitoringof

risk policy

Setting up the reporting

system

To make the company’srisk positions transparent

Aim:

n Risk Controlling in Treasury is part of a risk management system that covers all areas of a company.It involves measuring, controlling, and monitoring the relevant risk categories. Setting up thereporting system and creating a link to feed data to management, are key factors when it comes tomaking the risk positions your company has entered more transparent.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 336: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 8

SAP AG 1999

Defining the Organizational Framework

1. Establish a Target-Method Hierarchyl Define your revenue and risk targetsl Formulate investment and risk guidelines for your companyl Translate these into operational specifications

2. Establish a Process Structurel Identify the processesl Create a model of the process flows in your companyl Break this down into individual activities and assign

these to jobsl Use this information to create an authorization and

release concept

n Management is responsible for defining the framework within which treasury transactions areexecuted. There are three main task areas here:

n Specifying the basic business principles, including:

ü Trading strategies for the respective instruments

ü The markets on which trading is allowed

ü Transaction volume, organization (contract components), and documentation.

n Risk limitation, including:

ü Procedures for measuring and controlling risk

ü Value of the permitted risk positions according to instruments or organizational units

ü Reaction to extreme market trends or exceeded limits

ü Internal reporting system

n Organization, including:

ü The areas of responsibility and functions of individual employees

ü Division into function areas

ü Human resources and technical equipment.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 337: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 9

SAP AG 1999

Investment and Risk Guidelines

Internal External

Revenuetargets

Risktargets

Investmentregulations

Riskregulations

LimitsRelevantproduct types

Hedgingstrategies

Reportingsystem

Investment andrisk guidelines

n In the financial services area, there are countless statutory norms and controlling bodies that monitorentered risks to protect the investor.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 338: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 10

SAP AG 1999

Selection of Financial Instruments

n Mortgageloans

n Borrower'snote loans

n Policy loansn Other

loans

n Fixed-termdeposits

n Deposits atnotice

n CommercialPaper

Product types

DerivativesForexLoansSecuritiesMoney market

n Stocksn Subscription

rightsn Investment

certificatesn Bondsn Convertible

bondsn Warrant bondsn Warrants

n Forexspotdeals

n Forwardexchangedeals

n Forex swaps

n Caps / Floorsn FRAsn Swaps

- Interest rate- Interest rate curr.

n OTC options - Currency - Interest rate - Security - Swaption

n Futures

Hedginginstruments

Investment/Borrowinginstruments

n In the short-term area, money market transactions and forex transactions allow you to bridgeliquidity deficits or surpluses. In the medium to long-term area, investments and borrowings areadditionally represented by securities transactions and loan transactions.

n Derivative financial instruments, on the other hand, help you hedge against interest rate and currencyrisks.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 339: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 11

SAP AG 1999

Hedging

HedgingHedging

Hedgingstrategy

Hedgingrate

Hedgingobject

Overall position

Portfolio position

Single position

Macro hedge

Portfolio hedge

Micro hedge

Full hedge 100%

Partial hedge x%

* Release not yet specified

n Hedging is a way of counteracting risk. It involves setting up an offsetting position, which developsin the opposite way to the underlying position.

n Risk objects are either cash flows resulting from an operating business or from Treasurytransactions/positions such as loans, securities, or money market transactions.

n Exchange rates, interest rates and volatilities are all sources of risk.

n You can match risk and hedged items and hence determine hedged and non-hedged items using theMarket Risk Management component.

n Hedge transactions are usually forward transactions (symmetrical instruments) or options(asymmetrical instruments) as well as combinations of these.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 340: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 12

SAP AG 1999

Risk Process in Treasury

Minimum balancesMinimumyields/MaximumfundingratesDefinition oflimitsHedgingrates

Portfoliogeneration usingreal and fictitioustransactions withreference to thetarget values

Valuation on thebasis of marketdata (actual data)and scenario data(planning data)

Determination ofcontrol indicators

Selection ofconcrete investmentand borrowingtransactions orhedging alternatives

Trading

Liquidity statusCashpositionLiquidityforecast

Portfolio positionPosition analysis

ExposureCash mgmtfor forexexposureGap analysis forinterest exposure

Market dataDatafeed

Targets Informationprocurement

Assessmentof possiblesolutions

ProcessingMonitoringDecision

ProcessingAccountingReporting

Risk Monitoring and Control

Revenue/Risk

targets

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 341: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 13

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management: Functions

Comprehensive risk valuation and control

l Procuring informationn Interest and currency exposure

n Mark-to-market, effective rate, effective interestrate

n Sensitivities, cash flow analyses

n Value at risk

l Evaluating alternative solutionsn Simulations

n What-if analyses

n Crash scenarios

l Transforming risks using Treasury Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 342: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 14

SAP AG 1999

Integration of Scenarios and FictitiousTransactions

Methods

Cash flowsMarket data Calculation

MarketdatabaseMarket

database

ScenariodatabaseScenariodatabase

ActualpositionActual

position

Fictitioustransactions

Fictitioustransactions

Key figures(IRR, NPV, Option

premium, exposure,...)

Key figures(IRR, NPV, Option

premium, exposure,...)

Evaluation

(graphic, list,...)

Buffer

Portfoliodetermination

throughselection

n IRR = Internal Rate of Return (effective interest rate)

n NPV = Net Present Value

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 343: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 15

SAP AG 1999

Interest

Underlying trans.:

Operational cash flows fromCash ManagementMoney Market, Loans, Securities

Hedging transactions:

Forward Rate Agreement

Swap (series of FRAs)

Interest rate options

- Floor (series of options)- Cap (series of options)(other forex and derivativetransactions)

Instruments in Currency and Interest Management

Currency Underlying trans.:

Operational cash flows fromCash Management

Hedging transactions:

Forward exchange transaction

Currency option- put- call

(other TR transactions)

TR-CMTR-CM TR-CMTR-CM

TR-TMTR-TM TR-TMTR-TM

TR-TMTR-TM

n Operational cash flows are drawn from Cash Management by means of special groupings.

n Financial transactions are selected directly from Treasury Management. There are numerousselection criteria available which help you to choose precisely the transactions you want.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 344: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 16

SAP AG 1999

Financial Instruments and Influencing Factors

Moneymarketintrst

Capitalmarketintrst

Int.ratevolat.

Exch.rates

Exch.ratevolat.

InstrumentsForward exchangetransactions Currency options(European, American,Barrier, Digital)Bonds, LoansMoney market trans.

Forward Rate AgreementsInterest Rate GuaranteesInt.rate, int.rate curr.swaps(incl.structures such as roller-coaster, LIBOR-in-arrears ...)SwaptionsCaps, FloorsBond optionsFutures, Optionson futures

Source: Sal. Oppenheim jr. & Cie.

n In the SAP System, money and capital market instruments are not explicitly separated. The interestvalue that acts as the price-determining factor for an instrument depends on the reference interestrates or yield curves defined in the evaluation type.

n You can use hedging instruments which react to the same risk factors to hedge underlyingtransactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 345: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 17

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Mark-to-Market Valuation

Mark-to-Market Valuation

In addition to valuing your transactions for accountingpurposes in accordance with the statutory accountingrequirements, you now wish to value your transactions withtheir market value. To determine market values, you calculatethe net present value of all the cash flows generated from thetransactions. The mark-to-market methodology provides thebasis for all analysis reports in Market Risk Management.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 346: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 18

SAP AG 1999

Mark-to-Market Valuation

l Mark-to-market valuation is available for all Treasurytransactions and for:n any points in time

n any horizons

n various scenarios

You can also display:n the calculation base

n a detailed log to check the individual calculation steps

n the interest rate sensitivities

n Marking to market means valuing a position at the price which can currently be achieved on themarket: “What price will I achieve if I close out the position?”

n For long positions this means determining the disposal price that could be achieved.

n For short positions it means determining the repurchase value.

n You can use the NPV method to determine and compare the market prices of various instruments.

n You also have the option of including simulated money market and forex transactions in thevaluations and analyzing their effect on the market value of the positions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 347: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 19

SAP AG 1999

Mark-To-Market Valuation: Procedure

Mark-to-Market Valuation

Deterministic instruments Option-related instruments

Fixed cash flows

Discounting tovaluation dates withthe relevant yieldcurve:- Bid / Ask- Rating

Variable cash flows

1. Determination of forwardrates from the relevantyield curve2.Calculation of futurecash flows3. Discounting

Uncertain cash flows

Option price formulas- Black & Scholes- Binomial- Garman/Kolhagen

Standardbonds

Fixed-rateloans

Money market

Floating rate notesVariable-rate loans

Caps / FloorsFX optionsSwaptions

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 348: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 20

SAP AG 1999

Example: Valuation of Swaps

Fixed interestcash flow

Interest cash flows based on swap rate and forward rates

Variable interest cash flow(from forward rates)

Cash flow

NPV

Zero bonddiscounting factors

n You can trace the individual processing steps involved in the NPV calculation in the details log ofthe mark-to-market valuation. With interest rate swaps, the first step the system undertakes is toseparate the fixed cash flows from the variable cash flows. The variable cash flows are then assignedvalues from the forward rates with the help of the yield curve used. This determines the timing of thecash flows (payment dates based on the transaction) as well as the payment amounts of all the cashflows.

n These cash flows are discounted to the horizon using the zero bond discounting factors.

ü The negative and positive NPVs of the individual payments are then displayed separately. TheNPV of the interest rate swap is equivalent to the difference between these negative and positivecash flows.

ü The NPV displays the market value of the interest rate swap at the horizon date on the basis of themarket data read on the “evaluation per” date.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 349: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 21

SAP AG 1999

Mark-to-Market Valuation - Calculation Base

Yield curvesPercent

Days

9.0

8.1

7.2

6.3

5.4

4.5

3.6

2.7

1.8

0.9

0.00.0 304.3 608.7 913.0 1217.3 1521.7 1826.0 2130.3 2434.7 2739.0 3043.3 3347.7 3652.0

All the market data used for the valuation is listed in thecalculation base. Yield curves can be represented graphically.

n You can display the calculation base from within any MRM report.

n This allows you to check the market data used for the valuation and, in the case of interest rates,display the data in graphic form.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 350: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 22

SAP AG 1999

Mark-to-Market Valuation - Details Log

Valuation parameters

Basic data of the transaction

04/18 04/17/YY 000360 000360 4.5600000 10,000,000.00 456,000.00 EURNPV calculation: positive cash flowsDate04/20/YY04/19/YY04/18/YY04/18/YY

Amount456,000.00456,000.00456,000.00456,000.00

Interp.int.rate3.32751373.78450824.33263014.8125205

Disc.factor0.9674420920.9278544900.8794129040.826289916

NPV441,153.59423,101.65401,012.28376,788.20

Curr.EUREUREUREUR

NPV calculation: negative cash flows

Date04/18/YY10/18/YY04/19/YY10/18/YY04/18/YY10/18/YY

Amount279,348.04-256,757.22-214,868.94-301,167.89-320,116.89-351,022.53

Interp.int.rate4.23263013.95800553.68450824.47328774.71252054.9431507

Disc.factor0.8819715310.9065540230.9296593940.8560674160.8294982080.801302453

NPV246,377.02-232,764.29-199,754.93-257,820.02-265,536.39-281,275.21-

Curr.EUREUREUREUREUREUR

NPV incoming side: NPV Curr. Rate NPV in displ.curr. 1,992,802.36 EUR 1.00000 1,992,802.36NPV outgoing side:

2,266,087.67- EUR 1.00000 2,266,087.67-

273,285.31- EUR 1.00000 273,285.31-

NPV Curr. Rate NPV in displ.curr.

NPV Curr. Rate NPV in displ.curr.

n In the details log you can monitor the calculations for individual transactions. Each step of thecalculation process is logged and displayed for that specific instrument.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 351: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 23

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Mark-to-Market

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 352: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 24

SAP AG 1999

Storing OTC NPVs

Mark-to-market

2

4

6

8

10

1M

2Y

4Y

6Y

8Y

10Y

EUR USD GBP

TR-TR-MRMMRM

Storage Valuation

TR-TMTR-TM FIFI

Money marketForex

Derivatives

NPVs

Financialaccounting

n In the tools area, you can store NPVs determined with the mark-to-market valuation in the OTCNPV table.

n These NPVs can then be accessed for the (accounting) key date valuation of the derivative financialinstruments within Treasury Management. Note that at present only the valuation of options withproduct category 760 is supported.

n In the key date valuation, the system translates the NPVs in display currency into the premiumcurrency and forms write-ups/write-downs or provisions on the basis of the corresponding localcurrency amount.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 353: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 25

SAP AG 1999

Managing Currency Risks

Risks arise from your operative transactions in foreigncurrency, which are the result of changes in the exchangerates. You use Market Risk Management to identify your opencurrency positions and conclude transactions in order tohedge against these.

You use a currency option as a hedge instrument and controlthe effect of the option on the exposure.

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Currency Risks

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 354: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 26

SAP AG 1999

Exposure Analysis

l Exposure analysis is used to measure open risk positions.

l To establish the currency risk, operational information from CashManagement (about underlying transactions) is compared withTreasury information (about hedging transactions). The systemmeasures the value directly affected by currency changes (thereaction value).

l To establish the interest rate risk, the system represents the interestrate sensitivity of the operational cash flows and the variousTreasury transactions (security, loan, money market, forex, andderivative transactions). The interest rate exposure is measuredeither in basis points or in terms of the value affected by interestrate changes.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 355: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 27

SAP AG 1999

Integration of a Company’s Cash Flows

PurchasingA/P

account-ing

Purchaseorder

Delivery

Invoice

Out-payment

Bankstatement

Cash Management

Liquidityforecast

Liquidityforecast

Cash positionCash position

Delivery date and payment terms

Updatedpayment history

Payment at agreed due date

value date

A/Raccount-

ingSales

Invoice

In-payment

Bankstatement

Salesorder

Delivery

Market Risk Managemente.g. currency exposure,

VaR

MRM

CM

n For an industrial enterprise, cash flows from operational business are the underlying transactions forrisk control. In MRM, the necessary integration is achieved by accessing the liquidity information inCash Management. The operational cash flows are available for:

ü analysis/simulation (with underlying transactions/forex)

ü the currency exposure

ü the interest rate exposure

ü the cash flow global evaluation

ü the value-at-risk evaluations

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 356: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 28

SAP AG 1999

Currency Exposure

Term from to

Underlying transaction

Hedging transaction

Open position

TR-TR-MRMMRM Currency

exposure

TR-CMTR-CM TR-TMTR-TM

MM

SDFI

l Term view

l Single transaction view

Transaction Transaction TransactionDocument Document Document

n The exposures of all selected currencies are displayed.

n The division into term intervals is determined when the currency selection is made.

n The currency exposure is displayed separately per currency and also by term interval, if required.The underlying transactions are the operational transactions transferred from Cash Management. The“From” date determines the start, the “To” date the end of the period from which the CashManagement data is taken. These underlying transactions are compared with all Treasurytransactions available in the corresponding currencies (hedging transactions). The open position iscalculated by adding together the underlying transactions and the hedging transactions (whichusually have an inverse value).

n In order to precisely compare the operational transactions with the financial transactions, you candiscount the payments from Cash Management to the horizon.

n From the total exposure view per currency, you can branch into the term view (details based on theterm intervals previously defined) or the single transaction view. If cash flows from various financialtransactions fall in the same term interval, they are displayed separately in the single transactionview.

n From the underlying transactions you can branch to Cash Management via the respective terminterval in order to execute an individual analysis of the operational cash flows.

n From the hedging transactions you can branch directly into Treasury Management’s singletransaction display.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 357: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 29

SAP AG 1999

Option Exposure

Slope of premium curve with changing spot rate

Spot rate1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10 1.12 1.14 1.16 1.18

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

Premium

What is option exposure and how is it determined?

n Exposure: The foreign currency volume that is directly affected by a change in the exchange rate.

n The graph above shows that there is no linear relationship between the price development of theinstrument underlying an option (here the spot exchange rate) and the value of the option (expressedin terms of the premium to be paid). Note that only the option value which is actually affected by achange in the underlying exchange rate counts as exposure. The relationship between the optionprice and the underlying price is determined with the help of the delta factor:

n Delta: Factor expressing the degree to which the option price reacts to a change in the exchange rate

==> Sensitivity factor (delta) multiplied by volume = exposure of option

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 358: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 30

SAP AG 1999

Currency Option

• The buyer has the right (the seller is obliged) to buy (deliver) or sell (take delivery of) an option:

- on a certain date (European option) or within a certain period (American option)- for a certain foreign currency amount (underlying)- at a certain price (strike price)

• For this right, the buyer pays the seller an option premium• The seller of the option then has the obligation to deliver (or take delivery of) the currency amount

• Calls: Buyer has the right to buy (seller must deliver)• Puts: Buyer has the right to sell (seller must buy)• Cash settlement or physical settlement (delivery / take delivery)

n Example of a call: With a USD/UNI call, strike price 1.80, the buyer has the right to purchase acertain USD amount from the seller at the strike price. The buyer will only exercise this right if themarket price lies above the strike price on the exercise date or within the exercise period. If this isthe case, the buyer can use the option to acquire the foreign currency amount at a lower price thanthat offered on the market.

n Example of a put: With a USD/UNI put, strike price 1.80, the buyer acquires the right to sell acertain USD amount to the seller at the strike price. The buyer will only exercise this right if themarket price lies below the strike price on the exercise date or within the exercise period. If this isthe case, the buyer can use the option to sell the foreign currency amount at a higher price than thatoffered on the market.

n Background: The buyer of a call is looking for protection against rising prices, the buyer of a put forprotection against falling prices. The seller reckons with the opposite price development and wants toimprove his or her position by collecting the option premium.

n There are two categories of barrier options - knock-in options and knock-out options. With knock-inoptions, the option right only comes into effect when the market price falls below (Down & In) orrises above (Up & In) the barrier. With knock-out options the option right expires as soon as themarket price falls below (Down & Out) or rises above (Up & Out) the barrier.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 359: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 31

SAP AG 1999

Create OTC Currency Option

++2USD UNIUSD 5,000,000.00

European Physical exercise

100076A100

1

UNI 300,000.00

09/29/YYYY

1.82 Invers

Contract data

Cross-rate calculator Option price calculatorCompany code IDES AG TransactionProduct type OTC curr. option Activity ContractTransactn type Purchase...Option

Exercise period Exercise Settlmnt.Currency pairUnderlying curr. Call PutStrikeValue date

Premium Pnt quoted Perc.quotedPointsPayment date Curr. Amnt

Contract date ......

n When you create a currency option, you record the intention to buy or sell a currency option. On theinitial screen, you enter the transaction type (purchase/sale) for the product type currency option andthe business partner.

n On the subsequent screen, you enter the term, the exercise and purchase premium for the option, inaddition to the transaction data for the underlying spot or forward transaction.

n You have the option of branching to the entry screens for the general transaction data. You can usethe tabs to navigate between the various screens (structure, administration, other flows, paymentdetails, cash flow, memos, status).

n To calculate the option premium, you can branch to the option price calculator.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 360: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 32

SAP AG 1999

Currency Option: Option Price Calculator

Curr.pair

Premium Calculation for Standard Options

Sensitivities

Market dataSpotSwapForward

1.04950 / 1.057500.00692 / 0.007431.05642 / 1.06493

Int. 1st currencyInt. 2nd currencyVolatility

2.8563 / 2.90525.5618 / 5.68689.8500 / 9.8500

Premiums

Put 1Put 2Put 3

1.04000/

0.01076 / 0.01361/

Strike European

/0.01116 / 0.01407

/

American

Call 1Call 2Call 3

1.04000/

0.02960 / 0.03512/

/0.02967 / 0.03516

/

Implied volat.Market data Swap/Forward Premiums List

EUR USD From To DaysValue date Value date

n While entering the option data, traders can use the direct link to the option price calculator tocalculate the accounting par value of the option premium. The option price calculator also suppliesinformation about the major sensitivities of the respective option. You can enter the option premiumeither as a percentage of the underlying transaction (in points) or as a fixed amount. The premium iscalculated on the basis of the spot price, the strike price, the term, the risk-free interest rates in bothcurrencies, the option category, and the volatility of the exchange rate.

n Click the Market data pushbutton to load the current market data: Spot rates, swap rates (are alwayscalculated using the yield curves), interest rates for currency 1 and 2, and exchange rate volatility.

n You can enter alternative strike prices (for up to 3 put options and 3 call options) for the underlyingforex transaction.

n You can calculate premiums for European and American standard options as well as Europeancurrency barrier options (exotic options).

n When you position your cursor on a premium and select the Sensitivities pushbutton, the systemcalculates and displays the option sensitivities (greeks). You can also display a list of the ratios forall the calculated options.

n If you specify an option premium, you can use the option price calculator to calculate the other wayand determine the underlying volatility (implied volatility).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 361: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 33

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Currency Exposure

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 362: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 34

SAP AG 1999

Managing Interest Rate Risks

You conclude money market, securities, or loans transactionsto manage your liquidity. The market value of thesetransactions like the market value of the operative cash flowsis subject to changes in the market interest rates. To protectyourself from value losses, you analyze the interest rate risksand use hedge transactions that are suitable for reducing yourinterest exposure.

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Interest Rate Risks

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 363: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 35

SAP AG 1999

Interest Rate Exposure

Term from to

Underlyingtransaction

MnyMrkt/Sec./ Loans

Forex/ Derivatives

Open position

TR-TR-MRMMRM Interest rate

exposure

TR-CMTR-CM TR-TMTR-TMSDFI

Transaction Transaction Transaction

Drill-down

lTerm view

lSingle transaction view

Document Document Document

MM

n The interest rate exposure is divided into three columns:

ü Operational transactions (underlying transactions) from Cash Management

ü Money market transactions, security transactions, and loan transactions, which are typicallyundertaken for liquidity reasons.

ü Hedging transactions from the foreign exchange and derivatives areas.

n As with the currency exposure, when you are in the overview screen, you can branch to the termview (details based on the term intervals previously defined) or the single transaction view. If cashflows from various financial transactions fall in the same term interval, they are displayed separatelyin the single transaction view.

n From the underlying transactions, you can branch to Cash Management via the respective terminterval in order to execute an individual analysis of the operational cash flows.

n From the hedging transactions you can branch directly into Treasury Management’s singletransaction display.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 364: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 36

SAP AG 1999

Interest Rate Exposure - Determine Basis PointValue

Step 1:Net present valuecalculation of future cashflows with current yieldcurves

Step 3:Recalculation of netpresent value

Cash flow

Discountingwith i

Discountingwith i + 1 BP

BPV

NPV

Time

12

34

Step 2:Shift of current yieldcurves by 1 basis point

Step 4:Calculation of net presentvalue difference(= Basis point value)

Yield curves euro

2

4.5

0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108

120

Term in months

Inte

rest

rat

e in

p

erce

nta

ge

EuroEuro + 1BP

2

n In the interest exposure report, you can choose to display either the value of x basis points or thevolume. When the basis point value (BPV) is calculated, the NPVs of the individual cash flows inthe future are calculated and added together on the basis of their currency- and term-specific interestrates. In a second step, the interest rates are increased or reduced by one (or a multiple of one) basispoint (0.01%). The NPVs are then calculated again. The BPV is the difference between these twoNPVs. It represents the value losses or increases the analyzed financial instruments show when theinterest rates are increased or reduced by one (or a multiple of one) basis point.

n The volume display is another way of displaying the interest rate exposure: The exposure isdisplayed as a quotient of the NPV difference and the number of basis points by which the curve wasshifted.

n On the selection screen (display type of the exposure), you can choose between these procedures.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 365: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 37

SAP AG 1999

Forward Rate Agreement

• Agreement between two parties (a buyer and a seller)- upon a certain interest rate (FRA rate)- for a deposit or a loan- for a period in the future

• Aim: To fix an interest rate today for a period in the future • Term: 3-24 months• Quotation: 3:9; 6:12; 12:24; (future period: total term)• Reference interest rate e.g. 3-month LIBOR, 6-month LIBOR• Interest rate comparison (fixed rate against reference interest rate) after waiting period and calculation of settlement amount due• Interest netting in the form of cash settlement, no exchange of nominal amounts

n Background: The buyer of a FRA anticipates higher interest rates for the reference period, while theseller anticipates lower interest rates

n Example: FRA 3:9; nominal amount 10 m UNI FRA rate 5% (=> in 3 months for 6 months) Reference interest rate 6 months LIBOR Interest rate comparison in 3 months, hedging period 6 months

6-month LIBOR in 3 months = 6%

=> Settlement payment to buyer= Interest rate difference x nominal amount x days in hedging period 360 x discounting factor

If the LIBOR rate were below the FRA rate, the buyer would have to make thesettlement payment.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 366: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 38

SAP AG 1999

Create FRA

Structure ...... ... ... ... ...

10/07/YYYY++8++11

10,000,000.00 UNI5.0LIB_3_UNIact/3602-

10/05/YYYY

63A200

11000Company code IDES AG Transaction

Product type FRA Activity ContractTransactn type Sale

...Term Start of term Start of hedge period End of hedge period Inclusive No. interest days

Interest structure Exercise amount Interest rate Ref. int. rate Int. rate method Fixing

Business calendar ...Contract data Contract date ...

n Forward Rate Agreements are financial instruments with which buyers and sellers specify a fixedinterest rate today for a future period. Both parties of the contract are free to choose the amounts,currencies, and terms; the interest rate reflects the forward yield curve.

n A fictitious money market transaction underlies the FRA whose capital amount is used simply as acalculation amount. An "8 against 11" FRA has a contract period of 3 months starting in 8 months.At this time, the contract is also settled and paid out. The buyer of a FRA is looking for protectionagainst rising interest rates, whereas the seller wants to protect against sinking interest rates. Youenter FRAs in the system according to the trading conventions represented.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 367: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 39

SAP AG 1999

Swaps

• A swap is an exchange of cash flows over a fixed period of time

• You define the cash flows when you conclude the swap, but their absolute value may depend on events in the future (e.g. interest payments at variable interest rates which are dependent on future reference interest rates)

• Depending on the type of cash flows to be exchanged, swaps can either be:

- interest rate swaps- currency swaps (cross-currency interest rate swaps)

Possible variants for interest payment swaps:PAYER: Outgoing interest payments fixed, incoming variableRECEIVER: Incoming interest payments fixed, outgoing variableBASIS: Variable against variable interest paymentsFIX TO FIX: Fixed against fixed interest payments

n In the case of an interest rate swap, each counterparty agrees to exchange cash flows in onecurrency during a certain period for a specified capital amount, without exchanging the said capitalamount.Possible variations:- Payer- Receiver- Basis

n A currency swap has the following characteristics:- Mutual exchange of funds at an agreed exchange rate in different currencies.- Exchange of interest payments on the basis of the agreed total capital and the agreed interest rate.- The original amount of the swap is reversed at maturity at the original exchange rate.Possible variations:- Payer - Receiver- Basis- Fix to fix

n Swaps offer comparative cost advantages; two partners use their different positions (credit standing)in different financial market segments to achieve cost advantages that they would not benefit fromindividually.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 368: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 40

SAP AG 1999

Enter: Interest Rate Swap

...

...

62A300

11000

10/15/YYYY10/15/YY+5

10M10/15/YYYY++124.6

360/360

UNI

12

10M10/15/YYYY++6

Lib_6_UNIact/360

6

10/13/YYYY

Int. Int. rate adj. Int. Int. rate adj.

Company code IDES AG Transaction Product type Int.rate swap (IRS) Activity Contract Transact type Payer

Term Business calendarStart Calendar 1End Inclusive Calendar 2

Outgoing interest Incoming interestNominal amnt Nominal amntEffective from Effective from1st due date Freq.mth 1st due date Freq. mthFixed rate Fixed rateVariable int. Variable int.Int. calc. meth. Int. calc. meth.

Contract dataContract date

n You enter the transaction data for the partner, the contract data, the term, and the actual tradingobject data (such as amount, currency, interest structure).

n You can also branch to the other entry screens to enter more detailed information.

n Condition overview screens allow you to display the incoming and outgoing side and the conditiondetails for each transaction. You can also change the nominal amounts and specify the interest rateadjustment methods.

n On the Conditions in Detail: Interest rate adjustment screen, you can specify the frequency in whichyou want the variable interest rate to be recalculated and the date on which the value of theunderlying reference interest rate should be determined. An interest rate adjustment can take place,for example, at the start of the period, regularly, or on individual dates.

n To start the interest rate adjustment automatically, choose Back office -> Interest rate adjustment ->Automatic.

n By choosing Extras, you can go to the net present value calculator for swaps.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 369: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 41

SAP AG 1999

Manual / Automatic Interest Rate Adjustment

Treasury:Treasury: Due Date ProcessingDue Date Processing

Automaticinterest rate adjustment

Determine Reference Interest RateDetermine Reference Interest Rate

Manualinterest rate adjustment

Planned fixing date MM/DD/YY

Reference Int. rate Act.fix.dte RtFxTmeLIB_3_UNI

Copy Cancel

Treasury: Due Date Processing

Transactn Status ProdTyp TType Text400000 0002 63A 200 Int. rate adjust. on ...

n The amount of the interest payments that can result from the derivative interest rate instruments isusually determined by a variable index (reference interest rate). Examples of these are the referenceinterest rates Libor_6_months, Libor_12_months. Today, for example, these may be worth 4.75 and5.23 percent, but their future values are not yet known. A vanilla swap with variable and fixedinterest rates is an example of a derivative financial instrument: Libor_6 against 5.5%, 20 year termwith interest payments every 6 months.

n Within the Derivatives application, you can generate flows for the fixed-interest side and thevariable-interest side of the contract when you create a swap. The payment amounts of the fixed-interest side can be calculated using financial mathematical rules as soon as you create the swap. Thefuture amounts of the variable interest rates are unknown, since the future percentage value of areference interest rate is unknown when the transaction is created. As a result, the activity "Interestrate adjustment" is necessary, since it changes a planned record (a record whose payment amount isunknown) into an actual record (payment amount is known). This activity takes place when theinterest rate is fixed.

n Interest rate adjustment is usually set up to take place in a daily batch process. This functiondetermines which planned records must be converted to actual records on these days (using thefixing date entered at record level). It then calculates the interest rate values for each referenceinterest rate, calculates the amounts, and writes the actual record to the database. Once the interestrate has been adjusted, the corresponding planned record no longer appears in the transaction. Theinterest rate adjustment function therefore fixes the interest rate of the planned record and generates aplanned record.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 370: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 42

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Interest Rate Exposure

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 371: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 43

SAP AG 1999

Analysis / Simulation - Key Figures

The aim of analysis/simulation is to simulate the impact ofhedge transactions in various market data scenarios.

The following key figures are available for analysis/simulation:

l Evaluation of Treasury transactions in the interest area

n NPV calculation

n Effective interest rate calculation

n Total return

l Evaluation of the Treasury transactions in the forex area

n NVP calculation

l Evaluation of the underlying transactions and Treasurytransactions in the forex area

n NPV calculation

n Effective rate calculation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 372: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 44

SAP AG 1999

Analysis / Simulation - Evaluations

The analysis/simulation function enables you to branch directly to:Interest area:

n Single transaction NPVs with transaction display

n Representation of the differences (comparison with the current NPV)

n Interest rate exposure (basis point value)

n Cash flow display

Currency area:

n Single transaction NPVs with transaction display

n Representation of the differences (comparison with the current NPV)

n Currency exposure (excluding/including fictitious transactions)

n Cash flow display

n Cash Management

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 373: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 45

SAP AG 1999

Analysis / Simulation - Structure

Realtransactions

Realtransactions +

Fictitious 1

Realtransactions +

Fictitious 2Current market dataScenario 1Scenario 2Scenario 3

l Entry of fictitious transactionsl Allocation to the columns real + fictitious 1 / 2

Navigation

Header datalOrganizational units for financial transactionslOperational cash flows with summarization data

TR-TMTR-TMTR-CMTR-CM

Output matrixfor key figures

lNPVlEffective interest rate

(interest rate analysis)lTotal return

(interest rate analysis)lEffective rate

(forex analysis)

Scenario data

n The analysis/simulation structure comprises various sections. The output matrix for key figures islocated centrally. The vertical axis of the matrix contains the various market data environments(current market data and scenarios). The horizontal axis displays the operational cash flows (onlyapplies to forex analysis with underlying transactions), the selected financial transactions, and thefictitious transactions.

n The header section displays information about the organizational elements (financial transactions) orthe operational cash flows (only forex analysis with underlying transactions), together with thegrouping, amount, direction, and summarization date. The selected review period, the currentcalculation day, and the current NPV are also displayed.

n The lower section contains the input fields for the fictitious transactions. You can enter them usingthe fast entry option, or by means of the input screens in Treasury Management (only applies forinterest rate risk analysis).

n There are various navigation tools located above the header section. These allow you to branch intovarious standard reports in order to continue your analysis of the selected positions.

n You can interactively call up new scenarios in the evaluations (or replace old scenarios), and movethe horizon for alternative calculations.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 374: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 46

SAP AG 1999

Exercise: Analysis and Simulation

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 375: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 47

SAP AG 1999

Integrated Market Risk Management

ResultsData inflow

Mark-to-marketvaluation

Mark-to-marketvaluation

Key ratios/values

Key ratios/values

Fictitious cash managementupdate

Fictitious cash managementupdate

ExposureHedging rate

ExposureHedging rate

Actual / Scenariomarket data

Actual / Scenariomarket data

Actual transactionsActual transactions

Cash ManagementCash ManagementControl panel

Integrates allincoming dataand resultingdata relevant

for risk

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 376: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 48

SAP AG 1999

Market Risk Management and Managing RiskPositions: Unit Summary

l This unit has given you an overview of the proceduresand methods used in Market Risk Management andintroduced you to the main evaluation methods:

n Mark-to-market valuation to calculate fair market prices foryour financial transactions

n Forex and interest exposure reports to identify openpositions in the currency and interest areas and to monitorthe effects of hedge transactions

n Planning and simulation options to anticipate potentialmarket developments and determine possible hedgingalternatives

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 377: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 49

SAP AG 1999

SAP Treasury Overview

Financial Accounting

Bank data

Businesspartner

Market data

DownloadMarket Risk Management:• Interest/currency

exposure• Sensitivities• Mark-to-market• Risk analysis/Simulation• Value at Risk

Cash Management:• Electronic banking• Liquidity status• Integrated operationalsystems

• Control functions

Transaction Management:• Management of financialtransactions and positions

• Transfer to FinancialAccounting

• Flexible reporting andportfolio analysis

• Datafeed interface

DD CC DD CC100100100100

TMTM

SecuritiesSecuritiesDerivativesDerivatives

Money market Money market ForexForex LoansLoans

Logistics

n The objective of the SAP Treasury module is to ensure efficient liquidity, portfolio, and riskmanagement.

n SAP Treasury is subdivided into the following three areas:

Cash Management (CM) offers tools for efficient liquidity analysis.

Transaction Management (TM) supports the management of financial transactions and positions.

Market Risk Management (MRM) provides methods and procedures for assessing risk positions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 378: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 50

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk PositionsExercises

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

• Mark-to-market valuation

• Fair market valuation of financial instruments

In addition to valuing your transactions for accounting purposes tocomply with the statutory accounting requirements, you now wish tovalue your transactions at their market value. The system determines themarket values by calculating the net present values of all the cash flowsgenerated from the transactions. The mark-to-market methodologyprovides the basis for all analysis reports in Market Risk Management.

1-1 Run a mark-to-market valuation for the transactions in your company code.

1-2 Look at the calculation bases and display the yield curves in graphical form.

1-3 Branch to the detail log, and navigate to one of the fixed-term deposits you havecreated to look at the valuation steps.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 379: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 51

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

• Managing currency risks using currency options

• Using Market Risk Management to analyze exchange rate risks

You have operative transactions in foreign currency, which are exposedto the risk of changing exchange rates. You use Market Risk Managementto identify your open currency positions and conclude appropriate hedgetransactions.

2-1 Call up the currency exposure for the transactions in your company code (selectsecurities, loans, foreign exchange, money market, and derivatives) and the operativepayment flows from Cash Management. Use the grouping "MRM".

Choose a display period from today up to a year from today, with monthly intervals.Discount the cash flows from Cash Management.

Save your settings as a variant.

2-2 Branch to the term view and the view showing the individual transactions. You candrill down to the display in Cash Management (underlying transactions) or TreasuryManagement (hedge transactions).

2-3 Discuss the effect of the cash management groupings. How should you organize thegroupings?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 380: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 52

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

• Managing currency risks using currency options

• Identifying suitable hedge transactions, entering transactions andmonitoring risk

You enter a currency option to hedge against currency risks you haveidentified, and check the effect of the option on the exposure.

3-1 Enter a currency option that changes the currency exposure for the interval you haveselected:

Conclude the option as a contract with the Deutsche Bank to hedge one of the openitems from the last exercise.

(Note: The exercise date of the option must fall within the time interval for the openposition.)

3-2 Use the variant you have defined to look at the new currency exposure, and discuss theeffect of the currency option. (in the exposure view, select the grouping "MRM").When the exposure is calculated, what amount is taken into account for the option?

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 381: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 53

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

• Managing interest rate risks using derivatives

• Analyzing interest rate exposure

• Creating a hedge transaction

After assessing your currency risks, you now want to analyze yourinterest rate risks. Interest rate risks arise from operative payment flowsfrom Cash Management, as well as from transactions in the moneymarket, securities and loans areas. These are listed alongside hedgetransactions from the foreign exchange and derivatives areas.

4-1 Look at the interest rate exposure for the operative payment flows (Cash Managementtab, Grouping "MRM") and financial transactions in your company code.

Define a variant for the time period for which you want to display the interest exposure(for example, from today to today + 2 years). Set the Display type for exposureindicator to display the exposure in terms of basis point value. Choose monthly timeintervals.

Save your settings as a variant.

4-2 Enter an interest rate swap that changes the interest exposure for the term you haveselected.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 382: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 54

4-3 Select the variant you have already defined and include the interest rate swap. Toisolate the effects of your swap, restrict your selection to derivatives and enter yourtransaction number in the selection screen.

4-4 Discuss the effect on your interest exposure and interpret the values displayed.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 383: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 55

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

• Analysis and simulation

• Analyzing your positions using scenarios and fictitious transactions

• Analysis report (Example: Foreign exchange)

In addition to using actual market data for valuation, you would like toanalyze the effects of possible market changes (scenarios). You usefictitious transactions to identify suitable instruments to hedge yourpositions before concluding actual transactions.

5-1 Check the USD cash flows in your company code (TRXX) with the grouping "MRM"for the next two months. To begin with, do not include any financial transactions in theanalysis. The summarization date simulates the flow of all operative cash flows on thisdate (simplified assumption in order to plan hedge transactions for this date).

5-2 Analyze your positions using the "High" and "Low" scenarios (these each representhigh or low interest rate levels and exchange rates).

5-3 Discuss the differences in the net present values.

5-4 Enter a forward rate transaction and an option as fictitious transactions and check theeffects on the net present values and the effective rate.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 384: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 56

Market Risk Management and Managing Risk PositionsSolutions

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

1-1 To run a mark-to-market valuation for the transactions in your company code:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Market Risk→ Information System→ Mark-to-Market→ Mark-to-Market Position Evaluation

Entries: Data; Suggestion:- Display currency: UNI- Evaluation type: 0001- Evaluation per = today- Horizon = today

Note: Market Risk Management always displays the market value forstocks.

1-2 To display the calculation basis:

From the report, you can display the market data that has been used by choosingCalculation basis (button). To view the yield curves in graphical form, press thegraphics symbol. You can then choose (select) a yield curve, or select all the yieldcurves using the symbols below the yield curve list. Press the graphics symbol again tosee the graphical display.

1-3 To display the detail log:

Choose Detailed log (button) to display the individual calculation steps. Using theproduct type and transaction number as a basis, navigate to one of the fixed-term deposittransactions you have created. If the horizon for the mark-to-market valuation is afterthe first position flow (investment/borrowing), the system displays and discounts thecash flows for repayments and interest. The overall net present value for the transactionis calculated by totaling the net present values for the individual cash flows.If the horizon is before the first position flow (but after the contract date of thetransaction), this position flow is also included in the valuation.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 385: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 57

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

2-1 To look at the currency exposure:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Market Risk→ Information System→ Exposure→ Currency Exposure

Entries: Data; Suggestion:- Evaluation type: 0001

- Evaluation per = today- Horizon = today

- Date from = today- Date to = today + 1 year

- On the Cash Management tab, enter "MRM" in the Grouping field,and set the Discount underlyings indicator.

- On the Output controller tab, choose monthly time intervals.

Save your settings as a variant (Save icon).

2-2 To navigate in the exposure display:

You can branch to the term view, or the view showing the individual transactions usingthe corresponding buttons. If you double-click an individual item in the Underlying orHedge transaction columns, the system branches to Cash Management or the detailtransaction view.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 386: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 58

2-3 Structure of Cash Management groupings:

The Cash Management groupings you use should be structured as follows:

- They should not contain Treasury levels (Treasury transactions can be selecteddirectly in MRM).

- They should cover the levels/groups that you want to set against Treasurytransactions.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 387: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 59

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

3-1 To purchase a currency option:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Foreign Exchange→ Trading→ Standard Option→ Create

Entries: Data

Note: Support for working out the option price:

Button: Option price calculatorEvaluation type: 0001 (Standard evaluation)Entries: Data (enter directly, or use market data button)Button: Premiums

3-2 To look at the changed currency exposure:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Market Risk→ Information System→ Exposure→ Call up currency exposure using a variant

→ Goto→ Variants→ Get

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 388: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 60

The system displays the hedge transaction next to the corresponding position. Evenif a position has been fully hedged (nominally), the system still shows an openposition if the delta of the option < 1. The option value considered for exposurecalculation is delta-weighted (nominal value x delta factor).

(You can see this when you view the option transaction. Choose Extras → OptionPrice Calculator → Button: Sensitivities.)

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 389: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 61

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

4-1 To look at the interest rate exposure:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Market Risk→ Information System→ Exposure→ Interest Exposure

Entries: Data; Suggestion:- Evaluation type: 0001- Evaluation per = today

- Horizon = today- Yield curve shift: 1 basis point

- Date from = today- Date to = today +2 years

- On the Cash Management tab, enter the grouping "MRM"- On the Valuation parameters tab, set the Display type for exposure

indicator to display the exposure in terms of basis point value.- On the Output controller tab, choose monthly time intervals.

Save your settings as a variant (Save icon).

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 390: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 62

4-2 To create an interest rate swap:

→ Accounting→ Treasury→ Treasury Management→ Derivatives→ Trading→ OTC Interest Rate Instrument→ Create

Entries: Data; Example: Receiver swap

Field name or data type Values

Contract date Today

Term start Today + 2 days

Term end +++5

Outgoing interest

Nominal amount 5,000,000.00 UNI

Effective from Today + 2 days

1st due date ++6

Freq. month 6

Var. interest LIB_6_UNI

Int. calc. method Act/360

Incoming interest

Nominal amount 5,000,000.00

Effective from Today + 2 days

1st due date ++12

Freq. month 12

Fix. rate 5

Int. calc. method 360/360

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 391: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 63

4-3 To look at your interest rate exposure:

→ Accounting→ ... → Exposure→ Interest Exposure

→ Variants→ Get

4-4 In the basis point value display, the values in the interest exposure show the differencein the net present values of the cash flows for the respective periods (in other words, anet present value gain or loss), which would result from a change of 0.01% (equivalentof one basis point) in the interest rate level. If the open position is very small, thismeans that a high proportion of the interest rate risk has been hedged.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 392: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 64

Unit: Market Risk Management and ManagingRisk Positions

5-1 To analyze/simulate positions for USD cash flows:

→ Accounting→ Market Risk

→ Analysis/Simulation → With Underlyings → Currency Risk

Entries: Data; Suggestion:- Evaluation type: 0001

- Transaction currency: USD- Base currency: UNI

- Evaluation per = today- Horizon = today

- Date from = today- Date to = today +2 months

- On the Cash Management tab, enter the grouping "MRM"

Start the report

5-2 To incorporate scenarios:Enter "high" and "low" scenarios on the report screen, and choose Calculate.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Page 393: AC030_Treasury.pdf

(C) SAP AG AC030 65

5-3 Changes to the net present values:In the case of outgoing payments, a lower net present value is an advantage (in otherwords, a lower dollar amount would have to be entered today to meet your paymentcommitments on the summarization date). By contrast, a higher net present value is anadvantage in the case of an incoming payment.

5-4 To enter fictitious transactions:

− Forward transaction: Enter 60A/102, amount, inflow (+) or outflow (-), strike (= rate of theforward transaction) and due date, choose Calculate.

− Option: (Select “Fk2” to display the option transaction next to the forward transaction),enter 76A/100, amount, purchase call = inflow (+) or purchase put = outflow (-), strike anddue date. You can enter the premium manually or let it be calculated automatically bychoosing Calculate.

As a rule, an option allows you to participate in a positive market trend, whereas aforward transaction only serves as a hedging instrument, since both parties are under anobligation. The advantage of the forward transaction is that it is a cheaper alternative ifthe market trend is negative.

PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com